第10章巴利
10. Dasamo paricchedo
色分别的解说巴利
Rūpavibhāgavaṇṇanā
622 起始,是在摄颂中。现在,是紧随心与心所的分别之后。分别,就是通过义释和再释,就其自相来显示。巴利
622.Ādimhīti uddesagāthāyaṃ. Idānīti cittacetasikavibhāvanānantaraṃ. Vibhāvananti niddesapaṭiniddesavasena sarūpato pakāsanaṃ.
623 “被损害”是指被寒冷、炎热等改变,或者也可以理解为“被造成”。而改变的发生,就是在寒冷等对立条件聚集时,不相似地生起。因为对于依各自条件生起并已安住的诸法,不可能由其他任何事物使之改变。所以,不像先前已生起的色相续那样,后来生起的诸法由于异分条件的聚合,而不相似地生起,在这里就应当理解为“被损害”。这样说来,数论师的变异论就被直接否定了。岂非非色法在对立条件聚合时,也能获得不相似地生起吗?确实能获得,但并不是更显著的。这里所指的是更显著的不相似地生起,以最殊胜的方式来说,就像“应将少女给予端严者”(《相应部》3.78)那样。巴利
623.Ruppatīti sītuṇhādīhi vikāramāpajjati, āpādīyatīti vā attho. Vikārāpatti ca sītādivirodhipaccayasannidhāne visadisuppattiyeva. Na hi yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppajjitvā ṭhitadhammānaṃ aññena kenaci vikārāpādanaṃ sakkā kātuṃ, tasmā purimuppannarūpasantati viya ahutvā pacchā uppajjamānānaṃ visabhāgapaccayasamavāyena visadisuppattiyeva idha ‘‘ruppana’’nti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañca katvā saṅghiyānaṃ vipariṇāmavādo paccakkhato hoti. Nanu ca arūpadhammānampi virodhipaccayasamavāye visadisuppatti labbhatīti? Saccaṃ labbhati, na pana vibhūtatarā. Vibhūtatarā hettha visadisuppatti adhippetā ukkaṭṭhagativasena yathā ‘‘abhirūpassa kaññā dātabbā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.78).
怎么知道这一点?从提到寒冷等就能知道。正如这样说过——巴利
Kuto etaṃ viññāyatīti ce? Sītādiggahaṇato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
比丘们,为什么管它叫“色”呢?比丘们,因为它被恼坏,所以称为“色”。被什么恼坏呢?被冷恼坏,被热恼坏,被饥饿恼坏,被口渴恼坏,被虻、蚊虫、风、日晒、蛇蝎等的接触恼坏。比丘们,正因为被恼坏,所以称为“色”。巴利
‘‘Kiñca, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ vadetha, ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā rūpanti vuccati. Kena ruppati? Sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppati, jighacchāyapi ruppati, pipāsāyapi ruppati, ḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassenapi ruppati, ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā rūpanti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.79).
在这里,举出寒等,是为了说明:被寒等触碰时所造成的变坏更为明显,所以这里取的正是这个意思。否则,如果只靠“被变坏”这个笼统的说法就已经成立,那么举出寒等就变得没有意义了。巴利
Ettha hi sītādiggahaṇaṃ sītādinā phuṭṭhassa ruppanaṃ vibhūtataraṃ, tasmā tadevettha gahitanti ñāpanatthaṃ. Itarathā ruppatīti sāmaññavacaneneva siddhe sītādiggahaṇaṃ niratthakaṃ siyāti.
如果真是这样,梵天界怎么还会有“色”这个名称呢?那里并没有能造成伤害的寒冷等特殊的触啊。确实如此,但那里也仍然叫“色”,因为并没有超出色的自性。即使是不变坏者,也因为没有超出“变坏”的自性,所以也有“色”的名称。就像还没有挤出的牛奶,因为没超出它自身的性质,仍然叫“奶”一样。或者也可以说,虽然那里没有能造成伤害的寒冷等特殊触,却有能资益的触。因为梵天确实有时节所生的色法,所以那里确实有“变坏”,因此在那里施设“色”的名称没有任何障碍。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ brahmaloke rūpasamaññā? Na hi tattha upaghātako sītādiphassaviseso labbhatīti? Saccaṃ, tatthāpi taṃsabhāvānativattanato. Aruppanassāpi hi ruppanasabhāvānativattanato rūpasamaññā hoti. Yathā aduddhampi khīraṃ taṃsabhāvānativattanato ‘‘duddha’’nti vuccatīti. Atha vā kiñcāpi tattha upaghātako sītādiphassaviseso natthi, anuggāhako pana atthi. Tathā hi brahmānaṃ utujarūpaṃ atthi, tasmā attheva tattha ruppananti na koci tattha rūpasamaññāya vibandhoti.
或者,“令显现”的意思是:当它自己存在时,就使自己的相续产生变化。这样,在前一种解释里,变化的产生被说明为“被损害”。而在这个解释里,所说明的“被损害”是:当对立的诸缘聚集时,在本身存在的自身相续中,成为不相似生起之因的那种状态。按这一立场,根本不会产生非色法也有色这个名字的过失。因为非色法是在灭去之后,才以无间缘等生起非色法,而不是在它存在的时候。有些人说,“色”这个词是在撞击而发生变化时的惯用法,所以非色法因为没有撞击,就没有色的名称。另一些人说,撞击就是“被损害”。按他们的看法,虽然只有有碍色才能得到色的名称,但由于以部分来称呼整体,一切色都得到色的名称。不过,这里有些人说:“‘令显现’是就色处而说的。”因为当它发生颜色的变化时,就令显现,也就是表明它进入了心中。但这一点在后面解说色处时会单独说到,所以在这里没有必要加以注释。所谓“妙色”,是因为三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、一寻光、顶髻等庄严而具有美妙的身体;或者,“色”这个词是自性之义,就像“世间中可爱色、可意色”等说法里那样,因此“妙色”就是美妙的自性。通过显示它与十力、四无畏等不共功德的结合,也就显示了导师法身圆满的庄严。巴利
Rūpayatīti vāti sayaṃ vijjamānameva attano santānaṃ vikāramāpādayatīti attho. Iti purimaviggahena vikāruppatti ‘‘ruppana’’nti dīpitaṃ. Iminā pana virodhipaccayasannipāte vijjamānasseva yo attano santāne visadisuppattihetubhāvo, taṃ ruppananti dīpitaṃ hoti. Imasmiṃ pakkhe arūpassa rūpasamaññāpasaṅgo eva natthi. Niruddhameva hi taṃ anantarādipaccayehi arūpaṃ uppādeti, na vijjamānanti. Ghaṭṭane vikārāpattiyaṃ rūpa-saddassa ruḷhī, tasmā arūpadhammānaṃ ghaṭṭanābhāvato na tesu rūpasamaññāti keci. Paṭighāto ruppananti apare, tesaṃ matena kiñcāpi sappaṭigharūpānameva rūpasamaññāpasaṅgo, atha kho avayavavohārena samudāyopi voharīyatīti sabbameva rūpaṃ rūpasamaññaṃ labhati. Keci panettha ‘‘rūpayatīti vaṇṇāyatanavasena vutta’’nti vadanti. Tañhi vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ rūpayati, hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti. Tayidaṃ upari vaṇṇāyatananiddese visuṃyeva vuccatīti na tassa idha saṃvaṇṇane payojanaṃ atthi. Surūpoti dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāketumālādīhi alaṅkatattā sobhanarūpakāyo, sabhāvattho vā rūpa-saddo ‘‘yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.114) viya, tasmā surūpoti sobhanasabhāvo, tena dasabalacatuvesārajjādiasādhāraṇaguṇavisesasamāyogadīpanato satthu dhammakāyasampattiyāpi sobhanatā dassitā hoti.
624 依大种与所造色的区别这句话里,因为所造色是依靠大种才生起的,所以大种就是“所造色所依靠的”。或者,这里只是省略了前面的词,直接用“种”这个字来指大种本身,所以说“四种大种”。所造色只是执取大种,而自身不被大种或其他法所执取,所以叫“所造”。这样说来,四种大种虽然互相依靠而生起,但并不会因此就成了所造色。因为它们并不只是互相执取,它们自身也执取所造色,所以由于取用“所造”一词的功能限定,大种并不会因此就成了所造色。或者,依照“四种大种的所造色”这一说法,只有依止四大种才是所造色的特征,而不是依止三大种等,所以它们并不是所造色。大种和所造合起来就是“大种所造”,依它们而作区分,就是“依大种与所造色的区别”。因为“大种”一词是通性别的,所以说“四种大种”。所谓“所造”,是指所造色;应当知道,这就像在“paṭisaṅkhā yoniso”等词中省略了 ya 音一样。巴利
624.Bhūtopādāyabhedatoti ettha tadadhīnavuttitāya bhavati ettha upādārūpanti bhūtaṃ. Atha vā mahābhūtāyeva idha purimapadalopavasena bhūta-saddena vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘catubbidhā mahābhūtā’’ti. Bhūtāni upādiyateva, na pana sayaṃ tehi aññehi vā upādiyatīti upādāyaṃ. Evañca katvā catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ aññamaññaṃ nissāya pavattamānānampi upādāyarūpatāpasaṅgo natthi. Na hi te kevalaṃ aññamaññaṃ upādiyanteva, atha kho sayaṃ upādāyarūpehi upādiyanti, tasmā upādāya-saddaggahaṇasāmatthiyato na mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpatāpasaṅgoti. Atha vā ‘‘catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti (dha. sa. 584) vacanato catumahābhūtasannissitatāva upādāyarūpalakkhaṇaṃ, na bhūtattayādisannissitatāpīti na tesaṃ upādāyarūpatāti. Bhūtañca upādāyañca bhūtopādāyaṃ, tesaṃ vasena bhedatoti bhūtopādāyabhedato. Bhūtasaddassa ubhayaliṅgattā āha ‘‘mahābhūtā’’ti. Upādāti upādāyarūpāni ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādīsu viya ettha ya-kāralopo daṭṭhabbo.
625 625. 那么,哪四种是大种?它们又怎么被称为大种?哪些是所造色?它们又怎么被称为“所造色”?把这一质问放在心里,然后依次解答,说道“地界”等。“四种”就是这四种。既是大,又是种,所以叫“大种”。意思是:以这个大种,在包括天界在内的世界中,以广大的状态显现的正自觉者。或者——巴利
625. Katame pana cattāro mahābhūtā, kathañca te mahābhūtasaññitā, kāni ca upādāyarūpāni, kathañca tāni ‘‘upādāyarūpānī’’ti vuccantīti idaṃ codanaṃ hadaye katvā kamena sodhento āha ‘‘pathavīdhātū’’tiādi. Cattārometi cattāro ime. Mahā ca so bhūto cāti mahābhūto, tena mahābhūtena sadevake loke mahantabhāvena pātubhūtena sammāsambuddhenāti attho. Atha vā –
时间吞噬众生,
一切确实都连同自身。
而那个已经变成吞食时间的人,
他煮了那个煮众生的人。巴利
‘‘Kālo ghasati bhūtāni, Sabbāneva sahattanā; Yo ca kālaghaso bhūto, Sa bhūtapacaniṃ pacī’’ti. (jā. 1.2.190) –
在前面的例子等处,如同先前一样,“已存在”这个词既用于众生,也用于漏尽者,所以“大已存在”的意思就是“大众生”,或者“大漏尽者”。因为即使漏尽者也由于结生已彻底断尽而仅是“已存在”,不会“正在成为”,也不会“将会成为”,因此被称为“已存在”。巴利
Ādīsu viya bhūta-saddassa sattesu, khīṇāsavesu ca pavattanato mahābhūtenāti mahatā sattena, mahākhīṇāsavenāti vā attho. Khīṇāsavopi hi parikkhīṇapaṭisandhikattā bhūtoyeva na bhavati, na ca bhavissatīti bhūtoti vuccati.
626 “大而显现”:在执取相续和非执取相续中,凭借俱有的界而成为大、已存在、已生、已产生,这就是它的意思。在它们的非执取相续中——巴利
626.Mahantā pātubhūtāti upādinnakasantānepi anupādinnakasantānepi sasambhāradhātuvasena mahantā hutvā bhūtā jātā nibbattāti attho. Tesaṃ anupādinnakasantāne –
‘‘Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584) –
按照这个方式,已经说明了它广大显现的性质。在执取相续中,也应当依据数百由旬大的鱼、龟,以及三俱卢舍大的天、阿修罗等身体来理解。这也是曾经说过的:“诸比丘,大海中也有身量百由旬的众生”等等。巴利
Ādinā nayena mahantapātubhūtatā vuttā. Upādinnakasantānepi anekayojanasatikamacchakacchapatigāvutappamāṇadevadānavādisarīravasena daṭṭhabbā. Vuttampi hetaṃ ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, mahāsamudde yojanasatikāpi attabhāvā’’tiādi (a. ni. 8.20; cūḷava. 385; udā. 45).
与“大种相似”者:因为能让人看到种种神奇变化、又能让人看到种种存在物,所以是大的存在,或者说它们之中有大的神奇,因此叫“大种”,也就是幻师;或者像夜叉之类,从出身来说本身就是大存在,所以叫“大种”。它们与这些相似,所以叫“与大种相似”。就像幻师把不是宝珠的水变成宝珠给人看,把不是黄金的土块等变成黄金给人看;又像他们自己明明不是夜叉、不是鸟,却能显现出夜叉等的样子;同样地,这些(四大种)自己明明不是青色,却能显现出青色的所造色;自己明明不是黄色……乃至自己明明不是白色,却能显现出白色的所造色。因此,由于与幻师大种的相似性,所以叫“大种”。巴利
Mahābhūtasamāti anekabbhutavisesadassanena, anekabhūtadassanena ca mahantā bhūtā, mahantāni abbhutāni vā etesūti mahābhūtā, māyākārā, yakkhādayo vā jātivaseneva mahantā bhūtāti mahābhūtā, tehi ete samāti mahābhūtasamā. Ete hi yathā māyākārā amaṇiṃ eva udakaṃ maṇiṃ katvā dassenti, asuvaṇṇaṃyeva leḍḍuādikaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ katvā dassenti, yathā ca sayaṃ neva yakkhā na pakkhino samānā yakkhādibhāvampi dassenti, evamevaṃ sayaṃ anīlāneva hutvā nīlaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ dassenti, sayaṃ apītāyeva…pe… sayaṃ anodātāyeva hutvā odātaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ dassentīti māyākāramahābhūtasāmaññato mahābhūtā.
就像夜叉大种抓取某个东西时,既找不到它存在于身体内部,也不在身体外面,也不是不依靠身体的各个肢节而停留。如果它停在身体内部,就不会遍满整个身体;如果它停在身体外面,那么被夜叉抓住的人所做的善业和恶业就不会属于那个夜叉;如果它不依靠身体的各个肢节而停留,那么被夜叉抓住的人被打时,夜叉就不会生起苦受,身体上也不会出现伤痕。正因为这一切确实都存在,所以它们处于无法指认的位置。同样,这些大种也既不能被认定为彼此在对方内部,也不能被认定为在对方外部,也不是不互相依靠而停留。如果它们在彼此内部,因为互相进入,就不能各自发挥自己的作用;如果它们在彼此外部,就会互相分离,这样一来“不分离”的说法就站不住脚了。因此,它们处于无法指认的位置。因为与夜叉大种相似,所以称为“与大种相似”。这些虽然也处于无法指认的位置,但以住立等各自不同的作用帮助其余三者,以俱生等缘为缘,确实是互相依靠而停留的。巴利
Yathā ca yakkhā mahābhūtā yaṃ gaṇhanti, nevassa antosarīre ṭhānaṃ upalabbhati, na sarīrato bahi, na ca tassa aṅgamaṅgaṃ nissāya na tiṭṭhanti. Yadi hi sarīrassa anto ṭhitā, sakalasarīre byāpanaṃ na siyā. Atha bahi ṭhitā, yakkhaggahitakena katakusalākusalaṃ yakkhassa na siyā. Yadi cassa aṅgamaṅgaṃ nissāya na ṭhitā, yakkhaggahitake pahaṭe yakkhassa dukkhavedanuppatti na siyā, na ca sarīre rājiuṭṭhānaṃ bhaveyya. Yasmā panetaṃ sabbaṃ atthi, tasmā te aniddisitabbaṭṭhānā, evametepi na aññamaññassa anto na bahi ṭhitā upalabbhanti, na ca aññamaññaṃ nissāya na tiṭṭhanti. Yadi hi te aññamaññassa anto ṭhitā, na sakasakakiccakarā siyuṃ aññamaññaṃ anupavesanato. Atha aññamaññato bahi ṭhitā, vinibbhuttā siyuṃ, tathā ca sati avinibbhuttavādo parihāyeyya, tasmā aniddisitabbaṭṭhānāti. Yakkhamahābhūtasamānatāya mahābhūtasamā. Aniddisitabbaṭṭhānāpi cete patiṭṭhānādinā yathāsakakiccavisesena sesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ upakārakā hontā sahajātādinā paccayena paccayo hutvā aññamaññaṃ nissāyeva tiṭṭhanti.
由于它们以不真实的、虚假的可爱肤色和形体等欺骗众生,就像夜叉女之类一样,所以人们认为它们身上有大量不真实的东西,因此被称为“大种”。就像夜叉女等用可爱的黑色、褐色等肤色,用丰满、粗壮、瘦削等体形,用手、眉毛等动作,把自己可怕的本质掩盖起来,欺骗众生,让他们落入自己的掌控;同样,这些地水火风四大种也用男女等身上可爱的肤色、可爱的四肢形态、可爱的手脚手指眉毛等动作,把自己坚硬等身体特征掩盖起来,欺骗愚昧的人,不让他们看到自己的真实本性,从而让他们落入自己的掌控。巴利
Vañcakattā abhūtenāti yakkhinīādayo viya abhūtena atacchena manāpavaṇṇasaṇṭhānādinā sattānaṃ vañcakattā mahantāni abhūtāni etesūti mahābhūtāti sammatā . Yathā hi yakkhinīādayo manāpehi kāḷasāmādivaṇṇehi, puthulapīvarakisādisaṇṭhānehi, hatthabhamuādivikkhepehi ca attano bhayānakabhāvaṃ paṭicchādetvā satte vañcenti, attano vasaṃ nenti, evametepi itthipurisādīsu manāpena chavivaṇṇena, manāpena aṅgapaccaṅgasaṇṭhānena, manāpena ca hatthapādaaṅgulibhamukavikkhepena attano kakkhaḷattādisarīralakkhaṇaṃ paṭicchādetvā bālajanaṃ vañcenti, attano sabhāvaṃ daṭṭhuṃ na dentā taṃ attano vasaṃ nenti.
627-30 在“眼、耳”等当中,色本身就是色性。心既是所依处,又是意界和意识界的所依处,所以叫心所依处;或者说,它是心和识的所依处,所以叫心所依处。不过因为省略了前面的词,就只说是“所依处”。段食本身就是食性。虽然在《法集论》讲色的部分里,段食是最后才列出的,但在这里,为了把已完成的色法集中在一处说明,就把它列在心所依处之后。轻快性等,是指柔软性、适业性等这些性质,所以叫轻快性等;这三者就是轻快性等三种。其中,轻快的状态是轻快性,柔软的状态也是柔软性。对业适合、好用的,是适业,这种状态就是适业性。为了表明轻快性等本身并不是已完成的色法,而是已完成色法的变化状态,所以加上了“色的”这个限定语。“二十四”是数量上的限定,是为了排除强力色法等。其中应当说明的内容,后面会显现出来。“依”就是依止,而不是以依止的方式。由于从四种取中解脱、出离,所以其心离取,这就是“无取的心”。巴利
627-30.Cakkhusotantiādīsu rūpameva rūpatā. Hadayañca taṃ vatthu ca manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnanti hadayavatthu, hadayassa vā viññāṇassa vatthūti hadayavatthu, purimapadalopena pana ‘‘vatthu’’nti vuttaṃ. Kabaḷīkāro āhāroyeva āhāratā. Kiñcāpi dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ rūpaniddese kabaḷīkāro āhāro osāne uddiṭṭho, idha pana nipphannarūpānaṃ ekaṭṭhāne dassanatthaṃ hadayavatthuanantaraṃ uddiṭṭhoti. Lahutā ādi yāsaṃ mudutākammaññatānanti lahutādayo, tāsaṃ tayaṃ lahutādittayaṃ, tattha lahubhāvo lahutā, tathā mudutāpi. Kammani sādhu kammaññaṃ, tassa bhāvo kammaññatā. Lahutādīnaṃ sayaṃ anipphannattā nipphannarūpavikārabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpassā’’ti visesanaṃ kataṃ. Catuvīsatīti gaṇanaparicchedo, balavarūpādīnaṃ nisedhanattho. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati . Nissāyāti nissāya eva, na pana nissayavasenapi. Catūhi upādānehi nimuttatāya nikkhantaṃ upādānato mānasaṃ etassāti nirupādānamānaso.
631-2 因为“散布”就是“广布”,由于它是广布的状态,所以叫“地”,而“地”就是“大地”——这是按照词源规则来说明词音的成立。不过,这个解释是就“组合地”来说才合适,因为组合地确实是广布的、扩展的。如果就“自性地”来说,则“地”是以“扩展”之义得名,意思是:它作为俱生色的立足处而显现、现起。或者,前面那个意思也可以就自性地来理解。“Vāyana”就是“震动”,意思是作为往别处生起的因,把大种聚合体带走。“Tejeti”就是“paripāceti”(令成熟)或“niseti”(令焦热),意为以锐利性令其余三大种发热。这里由于偈颂体裁的关系,省略了“iti”一词,所以只说“tejeti”。同样,“āpeti”处也是如此。因此,“tejeti”就是“tejo”(火),“āpeti”就是“āpo”(水)。所谓“āpeti pālanā”,是指以应当保护的法为终点而“āpeti”,即遍满;因此这被称为“ābandhanakicca”(系缚作用)。“Āpīyati”就是“āpo”(水)。有人说,“sosīyati pivīyati”就是其义。然而他们说,这个意思在“有组合的水”中适用,在“自性水”中也同样适用。因为那自性水也以粗涩、令熟、令干的行相,似乎被其余三大种所饮取而转起。或者,“āpāyati”就是“āpo”,意思是“brūheti vaḍḍheti”(令增长、令广大)。因为此水确实以遍增为味。 “tesaṃ”指如前所说的、依大种及所造之分别的诸色。“vakkhāmi”就是“我将说”。“kiṃ kāraṇā”(什么原因)?回答说“lakkhaṇādīsū”等。“hi”一词是原因之义。因为当自性等被了知时,诸法就会显现,所以意思是:它们是彼等之后显现的原因。巴利
631-2.Patthaṭattāti puthuttā, tena puthubhāvato puthavī, puthavī eva pathavīti niruttinayena saddasiddhi dīpitā hoti. Ayaṃ pana sambhārapathaviyā vasena yujjati. Sā hi puthubhūtā patthaṭāti. Lakkhaṇapathaviyā vasena pana pathanaṭṭhena pathavī, sahajarūpānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena pakkhāyati upaṭṭhātīti attho. Purimopi vā attho lakkhaṇapathaviyā vasena labbhati. Vāyanatoti samudīraṇato, desantaruppattihetubhāvena bhūtasaṅghāṭassa pāpanatoti attho. Tejeti paripāceti, niseti vā, tikkhabhāvena sesabhūtattayaṃ usmāpetīti attho. Gāthābandhavasena cettha iti-saddalopato ‘‘tejeti’’cceva vuttaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘āpetī’’ti etthāpi. Tasmā tejetīti tejo, āpetīti āpoti vuttaṃ hoti. Āpeti pālanāti anupāletabbarūpapariyosānaṃ āpeti pattharati. Tathā hetaṃ ‘‘ābandhanakicca’’nti vuccati. Āpīyatīti āpo. Sosīyati pivīyatīti atthoti keci. Ayaṃ panattho sasambhārāpe yujjatīti vadanti, lakkhaṇāpepi yujjateva. Sopi hi pharusapācanavisosanākārena sesabhūtattayena pīyamāno viya pavattatīti. Āpāyatīti vā āpo, brūheti vaḍḍhetīti attho. Tathā hesa paribrūhanaraso. Tesanti yathāvuttānaṃ bhūtopādāyabhedānaṃ rūpānaṃ. Vakkhāmīti kathessāmi. Kiṃ kāraṇāti āha ‘‘lakkhaṇādīsū’’tiādi. Hi-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā lakkhaṇādīsu ñātesu dhammā āvi bhavissanti, tasmā tesaṃ parato āvibhāvahetūti attho.
633-4 那么,什么是相、味、现起、足处呢?当这些被了知时,诸法就会显现出来。为了澄清这个问难,他在依各自体性解说相、味、现起、足处时,说了“sāmaññaṃ vā”等话。“共相”就是无常等共通的性质。“自性”就是坚硬等与触等不共的体性。“作用”就是支持等作用。“成就”就是圆满的状态。比如在“suraso gandhabbo”(具味之香)这类说法中,香的成就是用“味”这个词来表达的,所以成就就是味。“果”就是依俱生和不同刹那而住立的果。“现起方式”就是诸法以应当被执取之性呈现于智的行相。“近因”就是主要的因。巴利
633-4. Kāni pana tāni lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānāni nāma, yesu ñātesu dhammā āvi bhavissantīti imaṃ codanaṃ sodhetuṃ lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānāni sarūpato kathento āha ‘‘sāmaññaṃ vā’’tiādi. Sāmaññaṃ sādhāraṇo aniccādiko. Sabhāvo kakkhaḷādiphusanādiko asādhāraṇabhāvo. Kiccanti sandhāraṇādikiccaṃ. Sampattīti sampannabhāvo. ‘‘Suraso gandhabbo’’tiādīsu hi gandhabbasampattiyā rasa-saddena vuccamānattā sampatti rasoti. Phalanti sahajātanānakkhaṇikavasena ṭhitaṃ phalaṃ. Upaṭṭhānanayoti gahetabbabhāvena ñāṇassa upaṭṭhānākāro. Āsannakāraṇanti padhānakāraṇaṃ.
依它而被了知,所以是相。这个界的相就是坚硬,因此是“坚硬相”。难道坚硬不就是地界本身吗?确实如此。因为,按照能被认知和不能被认知的词义差别,即使诸法本来并不混杂,也用概念假立所成立的区分来作这样的说明。这样才能理解到特殊的含义。或者,“被了知”就是相;这个界以坚硬的状态而被了知,所以是“坚硬相”,这里应当这样理解。其余诸界也是这样。“住立味”,就是作为俱生诸法的住立作用。即使不是俱生的法,从相续存在的角度来说,也有住立性。正因为如此,它们以领受的方式现起于智,所以是“领受现起”。这里是用作用来说明“现起”。而足处,则在这里把四界合在一起再说。巴利
Lakkhīyati etenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, kakkhaḷattaṃ lakkhaṇametissāti kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇā. Nanu ca kakkhaḷattameva pathavīdhātūti? Saccametaṃ. Tathā hi viññātāviññātasaddatthatāvasena asambhinnepi dhamme kappanāsiddhena bhedena evaṃ niddeso kato. Evañhi atthavisesāvabodho hotīti. Atha vā lakkhīyatīti lakkhaṇaṃ, kakkhaḷā hutvā lakkhiyamānā dhātu kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Sesāsupi eseva nayo. Patiṭṭhānarasāti sahajātadhammānaṃ patiṭṭhānabhāvakiccā. Asahajātānampi santativasena patiṭṭhānabhāvo hoteva. Tato eva nesaṃ sampaṭicchanākārena ñāṇassa paccupaṭṭhātīti sampaṭicchanapaccupaṭṭhānā. Iminā kiccavasenevettha ‘‘paccupaṭṭhāna’’nti dasseti. Padaṭṭhānaṃ panettha catunnampi ekato katvā vakkhati.
流出相,是指因为具有流动的性质,所以有溢流的相。增长味,是指不让俱生的诸法走向枯萎,而起到增长的作用。正因如此,它显示出使它们滋润的状态,所以这样说。收摄现起,是指像外在的水不让浴粉散开一样,不让俱生的诸法离散,而以收摄的方式现起。成熟味,是指令成熟状态生起的味。柔软赋予现起,是指像外在的火让紫胶、金属等变得柔软一样,令俱生的诸法生起柔软而现起。扩展相,是指充满的相。震动味,是指动摇的味。转移,是三大种在他处生起的因,或者像从种子引出芽等那样,是引出的意思。地界以水等三大种为足处,水界以地、火等三大种为足处,如此,每一界都以其余三大种为足处。巴利
Paggharaṇalakkhaṇāti dravatābhāvato vissandanalakkhaṇā. Brūhanarasāti sahajātadhammānaṃ milātabhāvūpagamanaṃ adatvā vaḍḍhanakiccā. Tathā hi sā tesaṃ pīṇitabhāvaṃ dassetīti vuccati. Saṅgahapaccupaṭṭhānāti bāhirakaudakaṃ viya nahāniyacuṇṇassa sahajātadhammānaṃ vippakirituṃ adatvā sampiṇḍanavasena saṅgaṇhanapaccupaṭṭhānā. Paripācanarasāti pariṇatabhāvakaraṇarasā. Maddavānuppadānapaccupaṭṭhānāti bāhiraggi viya jatulohādīnaṃ sahajātadhammānaṃ mudubhāvānuppadānapaccupaṭṭhānā. Vitthambhanalakkhaṇāti pūraṇalakkhaṇā. Samudīraṇarasāti kampanarasā. Abhinīhāro bhūtattayassa desantaruppattihetubhāvo, nīharaṇaṃ vā bījato aṅkurādikassa viya. Ekekā…pe… tabbāti pathavīdhātu āpādibhūtattayapadaṭṭhānā, āpodhātu pathavītejādibhūtattayapadaṭṭhānāti evaṃ ekekā dhātu avasiṭṭhabhūtattayapadaṭṭhānā.
确实,如果按身高和体围来算,在这中等大小的身体里,把地界碾碎成极微细的粉末,大概能有一陀罗那那么多。而这些地界,靠着一半分量的水界把它们黏合起来,才不会散开。水的本性是流动的,如果没有火界守护,就会变成湿黏的状态;正因为有火界守护,才不会变成那样。又因为不被水界冲散,被风界撑住,就达到了凝聚的状态。这样一来,即使是粉末一样细的地界,也因为水界黏合、火界成熟、风界震动的作用而得到支持:被水润湿,被火成熟,被风撑住,就像捣细的粉末一样,不会到处散落毁坏;不散不坏,才能形成男人、女人等各种不同的形态,也才能显出细、粗、长、短、硬、软等等状态。巴利
Ārohapariṇāhavasena hi majjhime imasmiṃ sarīre pariggayhamānā paramāṇubhedasañcuṇṇā sukhumarajabhūtā pathavīdhātu doṇamattā siyā. Sā ca tato upaḍḍhappamāṇāya āpodhātuyā yathā na vikirati, evaṃ ābandhanavasena saṅgahitā. Yathā pana paggharaṇasabhāvāya āpodhātuyā vasena kilinnabhāvaṃ picchalabhāvaṃ nāpajjati, evaṃ tejodhātuyā anupālitā. Yathā pana tassā vasena na vikirīyati, evaṃ vāyodhātuyā vitthambhitā saṅghātabhāvaṃ pāpitā. Evaṃ sukhumarajabhūtāpi ābandhanaparipācanasamudīraṇakiccāhi āpotejovāyodhātūhi laddhapaccayā sinehena temitā, tejasā paripakkā, vāyunā vitthambhitā piṭṭhacuṇṇāni viya na ito cito ca vikirīyati viddhaṃsīyati, avikiriyamānā aviddhaṃsiyamānā nānappakārakaṃ itthipurisaliṅgādibhāvavibhāgaṃ upagacchati, aṇuthūladīgharassathirakathinādibhāvañca pakāseti.
然而在此,呈黏着之相的水界,以地界为依托,由火界守护,被风界支撑着,所以不会滴落、不会流出、不会渗漏。就这样,它被三界护持着,不流出、不渗漏,表现出凝聚的状态。这确实以增厚为其作用。巴利
Yūsagatā ābandhanākārabhūtā panettha āpodhātu pathavīpatiṭṭhitā tejānupālitā vāyovitthambhitā na gaḷati , na paggharati, na parissavati. Evaṃ tīhi dhātūhi anupālitā apaggharamānā aparissavamānā piṇḍitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Esā hi anubrūhanarasā.
这里,由吃喝等食物消化成熟、以热为形态、以暖热为特相的火界,依止于地界,被水界摄持,被风界支撑,它消化这个身体,并带来容色的圆满。因为,这火界通过正确消化所吃的食物,成为味等圆满的原因,它消化这个身体,并带来容色的圆满。对于以业为近依、以心清净为因而生起的身体容色圆满,火界是特别的助缘;对于由时节和食物所生的色法圆满,就更不用说了。而由这火界所消化的这个身体,不会走向腐烂。巴利
Asitapītādiparipācitā cettha usumākārabhūtā uṇhattalakkhaṇā tejodhātu pathavīpatiṭṭhitā āposaṅgahitā vāyovitthambhitā imaṃ kāyaṃ paripāceti, vaṇṇasampattiñcassa āvahati. Sā hi yathānubhuttassa āhārassa sammā pariṇāmanena rasādisampattiyā hetubhāvaṃ gacchantī imaṃ kāyaṃ paripāceti, vaṇṇasampattiñca āvahati. Kammūpanissayāya hi cittapasādahetukāya ca sarīre vaṇṇasampadāya tejodhātu visesapaccayo, pageva utuāhārasamuṭṭhānāya rūpasampattiyāti. Tāya ca pana paripācito ayaṃ kāyo na pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati.
在这里,风界伴随着身体各个肢节,它的特相是推动和支撑,它依靠地界而得以安立在自己上面。就像它不会与俱生的诸法分离一样,它被水界摄持。就像俱生的诸法不会流散一样,它被火界维持。这风界就这样被三界各自按照适当的方式维持着,支撑着这个身体。而由于它[的支撑],这个身体被支撑着,不会倒下,能保持挺直。正因为每一界都是依靠其余三界的力量而运作的,所以才说“应当知道,在这里,每一界都以其余三界作为它的立足处”。巴利
Aṅgamaṅgānusaṭā cettha samudīraṇavitthambhanalakkhaṇā vāyodhātu pathavīdhātuyā attani patiṭṭhāpīyati. Yathā sahajātadhammehi visuṃ na hoti, evaṃ āpodhātuyā saṅgayhati. Yathā sahajātadhammā na parissavanti, evaṃ tejodhātuyā anupālīyati. Sā evaṃ tīhi dhātūhi yathārahaṃ anupāliyamānā imaṃ kāyaṃ vitthambheti. Tāya pana vitthambhito ayaṃ kāyo na paripatati, ujukaṃ tiṭṭhati, iccevaṃ ekekāya dhātuyā tissannaṃ dhātūnaṃ vaseneva pavattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘ekekā cettha sesabhūtattayapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā’’ti.
像这样,先结合语义说明了诸大种色的特相等之后,现在为了说明所造色,而说“cakkhati”等。由于界有多种含义,“cakkhati”这个词也有显明的含义,所以说“意思是显明”。而“cakkhati”的意思是:就像以识为依托,显示出平坦与不平坦,又像是在清楚地宣说。或者,“cakkhati”的意思是以识为依托而品尝色。因为“cakkhati”这个词,就像在“品尝蜜、品尝菜肴”等说法中那样,是品尝的意思。确实这样说过:“摩犍提,眼乐于色、喜于色、悦于色。”(中部2.209)后面还会说“在诸色中有牵引的作用”。如果这样的话,那么从“摩犍提,耳乐于声……”等说法来看(中部2.209),耳等也有品尝声等的作用,那它们也应该被称为“眼”了?不会。因为这是约定俗成的。因为“眼”这个词已经约定俗成地专指肉眼,就像“莲花”等词之于“泥生”等词一样。巴利
Evaṃ bhūtarūpānaṃ saddhiṃ vacanatthehi lakkhaṇādayo dassetvā idāni upādāyarūpāni dassento āha ‘‘cakkhatī’’tiādi. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ cakkhati-saddassa vibhāvanatthatāpi sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vibhāvetīti attho’’ti. Cakkhatīti pana viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya, abhibyattaṃ vadantaṃ viya hotīti attho. Atha vā cakkhatīti viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ rūpaṃ assādentaṃ viya hotīti attho. Cakkhatīti hi ayaṃ saddo ‘‘madhuṃ cakkhati, byañjanaṃ cakkhatī’’tiādīsu viya assādattho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cakkhuṃ kho, māgaṇḍiya, rūpārāmaṃ rūparataṃ rūpasamudita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.209). Vakkhati ca ‘‘rūpesu āviñchanarasa’’nti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sotaṃ kho, māgaṇḍiya, saddārāma’’ntiādivacanato (ma. ni. 2.209) sotādīnampi saddādiassādakabhāvo atthīti tesampi cakkhusaddābhidheyyatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi esa cakkhu-saddo locaneyeva padumādīsu paṅkajādisaddā viyāti.
635-6 在解释眼与色这一段里,因为“眼”这个称呼通用,所以为了把由此而来的全部“眼”按类别显示出来,就说了“其中,眼”等话。“其中”就是指在解释眼的地方。从慧与肉的区别来说,也就是慧眼、肉眼这样按慧和肉来分类。“其中”就是指这两种眼。慧本身就是慧眼。以名称来说有五种,这是前后文的关联。是哪些名称呢?回答说“佛眼、法眼”等。其中,以佛眼、法眼、遍眼这些名称来说,就是佛眼、法眼、遍眼;以智眼、天眼这些名称来说,就是智眼、天眼。依照次第,就是按照所说的顺序。种种,就是差别。“我”的意思是从我这里,或者从我的言说。你们应当知道、应当了解。巴利
635-6. Cakkhurūpassa niddesappakaraṇepi cakkhu-saddasāmaññato āgataṃ sabbampi cakkhuṃ pabhedato dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha cakkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ cakkhuniddese. Paññāmaṃsappabhedatoti paññācakkhu maṃsacakkhūti evaṃ paññāmaṃsānaṃ vasena pabhedato. Tatthāti tasmiṃ duvidhe cakkhumhi. Paññāyeva paññāmayaṃ. Nāmatoti nāmehi pañcavidhanti sambandho. Katamehi nāmehīti āha ‘‘buddhadhammā’’tiādi. Tattha buddhadhammasamantehīti buddhacakkhu dhammacakkhu samantacakkhūti imehi nāmehi. Ñāṇadibbehīti ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhūti ca nāmehi. Yathānukkamatoti yathāvuttaanukkamato. Nānattanti bhedaṃ. Meti mayhaṃ santikā, mayhaṃ vacanatoti vā attho. Nibodhatha jānātha.
637 在这里,为了说明“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间,看见众生有少尘垢的、有多尘垢的、有利根的……”(《中部》1.283)等经文中所说的“佛眼”,所以说了“意乐、随眠”等话。其中,“意乐、随眠”是指众生的意乐和随眠,意思是它们在这些当中生起。这里,心回来就躺在这个地方,所以叫“意乐”,就像老虎的栖息处一样。好比老虎虽然为了觅食而出去,但还会回来,躺在丛林深处,因此那丛林深处就被称为它的栖息处;同样地,心虽然在别处生起,但它回来之后躺在哪里,就应当知道那里是它的意乐。不过,这个意乐依照常见等看法分为四种。确实是这样说的——巴利
637. Tattha ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento satte apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.283) āgataṃ buddhacakkhu nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘āsayānusaye’’tiādi. Tattha āsayānusayeti sattānaṃ āsaye ceva anusaye ca, tasmiṃ pavattanti attho . Tattha āgantvā seti cittaṃ etthāti āsayo. Byagghāsayo viya. Yathā hi byaggho gocaratthāya pakkantopi puna āgantvā vanagahaneyeva sayati, teneva ca taṃ tassa āsayoti vuccati, evaṃ aññatthāpi pavattaṃ cittaṃ āgantvā yattha sayati, taṃ tassa āsayoti veditabbaṃ. So pana sassatadassanādivasena catubbidho hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍。
如实了知诸法的智,这就称为意乐。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita’’nti. (visuddhi. mahā. 1.136; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītivaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā)
随眠的讨论会在后面讲到。诸根的“胜劣”,是指信等五根的锐利与迟钝状态。锐利的根称为胜,因为它已经达到殊胜;迟钝的根称为劣,因为它还没有达到殊胜。应当知道,这里的佛眼,就是六种不共智中的前两种。巴利
Anusayakathā upari āgamissati. Indriyānaṃ paropareti saddhāpañcamakānaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāve. Tikkhañhi indriyaṃ ukkaṭṭhagatattā paraṃ, mudu aparaṃ anukkaṭṭhagatattā. Idaṃ pana buddhacakkhu chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu purimadvayanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
638 这里“下面……等等……”所说的“就在那个座位上,生起了远离尘垢、远离污秽的法眼”,这里所说的在下面三道中的智,就称为法眼。而所谓一切知智,就是被称为一切知状态的智。因为它是“一切知者”这个名称的根据,也是智慧生起的因由,所以称为一切知状态。应知,所谓遍眼,就是依蕴等而遍一切方面、以全面观见之义而说的应知之法。因此说:巴利
638.Heṭṭhā…pe… saññitanti ‘‘tasmiṃyeva āsane virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ heṭṭhā tīsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ dhammacakkhunti saññitaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutā panāti sabbaññubhāvasaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tañhi sabbaññūti abhidhānassa, buddhiyā ca pavattinimittatāya sabbaññubhāvo nāma hoti. Ñeyyaṃ samantacakkhunti khandhādivasena samantato sabbaso dassanaṭṭhena samantacakkhunti ñeyyaṃ. Tenevāha –
对他来说,这里没有任何未见之物。
此外,未知且不应知的东西。
他完全了知了一切应当了知的事物,
如来因此被称为遍眼者。巴利
‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci, Atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi ñeyyaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti. (cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85);
639 “生起之眼”是指这样的智慧:就像经文里说的“比丘们,对于以前从未听过的法,生起了‘这是苦’的眼,生起了智”(大品15)——这样在各地经文中出现的、在四圣谛上以三转的方式、按“苦应被遍知、已遍知”等十二种行相运转的,就是智眼。而像“比丘们,我以清净、殊胜的天眼看见……”(中部1.284)等经文中所说的、与称为第五禅的证智心相应的慧,为了说明这就是天眼,所以说了“证智心所生”等话。在这里,第一和第三个智只是欲界的。第四个智,阿难师说它和前两个一样,也是欲界的。另有一些师说:智眼也可以和圣道观智相应。不过,与最上道相应的观照省察智,看起来更为合理。巴利
639.Yaṃ cakkhuṃ udapādīti āgatanti yaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṃ udapādi, ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 15) evaṃ tattha tattha suttesu āgataṃ, catūsu saccesu teparivaṭṭavasena ‘‘dukkhaṃ pariññeyyaṃ pariññāta’’nti evamādinā dvādasavidhena ākārena pavattaṃ, idaṃ ñāṇacakkhu. Yā pana ‘‘addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.284) āgatā pañcamajjhānasaṅkhātaabhiññācittasampayuttā paññā, ayaṃ dibbacakkhūti dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiññācittajā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamatatiyañāṇāni kāmāvacarāniyeva. Catutthampi pana purimadvayamiva kāmāvacaranti ānandācariyena vuttaṃ. Ñāṇacakkhuṃ sahaariyamaggavipassanāñāṇantipi yujjatīti apare. Aggamaggena saha vipassanāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇanti pana yuttaṃ viya dissati.
640-4 像这样说明了慧眼的分类之后,为了再说明肉眼的分类,又说了“肉眼”等话。关于“有资具的净色”:依有资具眼和净色眼这两者来说,由这些所集成,所以叫“资具”,也就是组成部分。不过这些应当理解为起支持作用的、由四种原因产生的色相续。与资具一起,就是“有资具”。而所谓有资具,说的就是肉团,这是前后的关联。以眼窝骨为下:意思是由下方眼窝的骨所界定,这是关联。上:就是眼窝的上方。两边以眼角:就是眼窝两侧以眼角为界。内以脑髓:就是由位于眼窝内部的脑髓。以筋线系缚:就是用筋绳与内部的脑髓系在一起。整个凡俗世间:就是整个愚痴凡夫的世间。所谓“所……”:就是那个肉团。如莲花瓣:因为它宽广、舒展而呈青色,就像青莲花瓣一样。知:就是执取。那并不是名为眼:这样被执取的那个东西,并不是名为眼。那又是什么呢?因此说:“称为它的所依。”它的:就是那所意指的胜义眼的所依。此则是:这是总结。巴利
640-4. Evaṃ paññācakkhussa pabhedaṃ dassetvā puna maṃsacakkhussāpi pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘maṃsacakkhupī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sasambhārapasādatoti sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vasena sambharīyati etehīti sambhārā, avayavā. Te pana upatthambhakabhūtā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpasantatiyo daṭṭhabbā. Saha sambhārehīti sasambhāraṃ. Sasambhārañca nāma maṃsapiṇḍo pavuccatīti sambandho. Akkhikūpaṭṭhinā heṭṭhāti heṭṭhāgataakkhikūpassa aṭṭhinā paricchinnoti sambandho. Uddhanti akkhikūpato uddhaṃ. Ubhato akkhikoṭīhīti akkhikūpassa ubhayabhāge akkhikoṭīhi. Matthaluṅgena antatoti akkhikūpassa abbhantare ṭhitena matthaluṅgena. Nhārusuttena ābandhoti nahārurajjūhi anto matthaluṅgena saha ābandho. Sakalopi ca lokoti sakalopi bālaputhujjanaloko. Yanti yaṃ maṃsapiṇḍaṃ. Kamalassa dalaṃ viyāti puthulavipulanīlatāya nīluppaladalaṃ viya. Jānātīti gaṇhāti. Cakkhu nāma na taṃ hotīti tathā gayhamānaṃ taṃ cakkhu nāma na hoti. Kiñcarahi tanti āha ‘‘vatthu tassāti vuccatī’’ti. Tassāti tassa yathādhippetassa paramatthacakkhuno. Idaṃ panāti nigamanaṃ.
645-7 不过,为了说明这个有资具的眼是由哪些资具构成的,以及这些资具的自相和数量,所以说了“色、香”等。性,是指女人的女性性、男人的男性性,也就是可获得的本质。生,是说水界本身就是生起的来源。形态,是说当诸大种以各种方式排列时,依各自形态而被认知的色处。虽然生和形态跟水界、色处并非不同的实体,却仍然分开来说,是因为在如前所说的肉团中,如是状态与非如是状态的水等确实存在。因为水界和色处是随着相续而运转的,它们不同状态的差别就是生和形态。十种,是指四界以及依它们而有的色等,合起来就是这十种。四种所生,这是限定语,含有因的意思,是说它们由四种所生。巴利
645-7. Taṃ pana sasambhāracakkhu yehi sambhārehi sambharīyati, te sarūpato, gaṇanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘vaṇṇo gandho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhāvoti itthiyā itthibhāvo, purisassa pumbhāvoti labbhamānakabhāvo. Sambhavoti āpodhātumeva sambhavabhūtamāha. Saṇṭhānanti ca tena tenākārena sanniviṭṭhesu mahābhūtesu taṃtaṃsaṇṭhānavasena viññāyamānaṃ vaṇṇāyatanamāha. Āpodhātuvaṇṇāyatanehi ca anatthantarabhūtānampi sambhavasaṇṭhānānaṃ visuṃ vacanaṃ tathābhūtānaṃ, atathābhūtānañca āpādīnaṃ yathāvuttamaṃsapiṇḍe vijjamānattā. Āpodhātuvaṇṇāyatanānañhi santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ avatthāviseso sambhavo saṇṭhānañcāti. Daseteti catasso dhātuyo, tannissitā vaṇṇādayo cāti ime dasa. Catusamuṭṭhānāti antogatahetvatthamidaṃ visesanaṃ, catusamuṭṭhānikattāti vuttaṃ hoti.
648 眼……中略……命本身:这些色是纯粹由业所生的,而前面那些色则是由四种原因所生的。这样一共就有四十四种色,意思就是成为四十四种色。巴利
648. Cakkhu…pe… jīvitameva cāti imāni ekantakammasamuṭṭhānāni, purimāni ca catusamuṭṭhānānīti cattālīsañca cattāri ca rūpāni bhavanti, catucattālīsa rūpāni hontīti attho.
649-52 依这些色而言:就是依前面所说的,略说十四种色、广说四十四种色。总聚:就是从四周聚合在一起。在这其中,也有白色、黑色、红色,也有地、水、火、风。不过,这个因为痰增盛而成为白色,因为胆汁增盛而成为黑色,因为血增盛而成为红色,因为地增盛而成为坚硬,因为水增盛而流漏,因为火增盛而灼热,因为风增盛而动摇。这个因为具有资具,所以被智者、佛陀等宣说、阐明为“资具眼”。这里说“依止”:就是依止于这个有资具的眼,属于它、依赖于它。因此说“系属于此”。四界的净色:就是具有四界明净自性的净色。“于其白圆中”这个读法才合理。不过,有些书上写作“于彼白圆中”。黑圆之中:这里本来也应该说“于黑圆之中”,但就像“第四远”等例子那样,为了随顺韵律而省略了语尾,所以说成“黑圆之中”。这样解释,义理和衔接都很妥当。因为注释书里也说:“于被白圆围绕的黑圆之中”。另有一些人则按照现存的读法来解释:“于那完全被围绕的、有资具的眼之中,于白圆中,于黑圆之中。”见圆:就是站在面前的人,身体形态所呈现的地方,也就是见圆。巴利
649-52.Imesaṃ pana rūpānaṃ vasenāti yathāvuttānaṃ saṅkhepato cuddasannaṃ, vitthārato catucattālīsānañca rūpānaṃ vasena. Paripiṇḍitanti samantato piṇḍitaṃ. Yattha setampi atthi, kaṇhampi lohitampi pathavīpi āpopi tejopi vāyopi, idaṃ pana semhussadattā setaṃ hoti, pittussadattā kaṇhaṃ, ruhirussadattā lohitakaṃ, pathavussadattā patthinaṃ hoti, āpussadattā paggharati, tejussadattā pariḍayhati, vāyussadattā sambhamati. Idaṃ sambhāravantatāya sambhāracakkhūti paṇḍitehi buddhādīhi pakāsitaṃ paridīpitaṃ. Ettha sitoti etaṃ sasambhāracakkhuṃ nissito tadāyattabhūto. Tenāha ‘‘ettha paṭibaddho’’ti. Catunnaṃ pana bhūtānaṃ pasādoti catunnaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasannatāsabhāvo pasādo, ‘‘setena maṇḍalenassā’’ti pāṭho yujjati. Potthakesu pana ‘‘sete tu maṇḍale tassā’’ti likhanti. Kaṇhamaṇḍalamajjheti idhāpi ‘‘kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe’’ti vattabbe ‘‘catutthadū’’tiādīsu viya chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ vibhattilopaṃ katvā ‘‘kaṇhamaṇḍalamajjhe’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañhi attho ca yojanā ca suṭṭhu upapannā honti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi hi ‘‘setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596) vuttaṃ. Apare pana yathāṭhitavaseneva pāṭhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘sabbaso parikkhittassa tassa sasambhārassa cakkhuno majjhe setamaṇḍale kaṇhamaṇḍale majjhe’’ti yojenti. Diṭṭhamaṇḍaleti abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidesabhūte diṭṭhamaṇḍale.
653-5 就像刹帝利王子由四位乳母照料,她们负责抱持、沐浴、打扮、扇风;同样,这四大界作为他的依靠,也对他做了抱持、结合、成熟、推动这四件事,从而成为他的助益。由时节、心等:是指由时节、心、食这三种能产生相续的因素。这里说的是存在于各色聚之间的时节和食。由寿命所守护:是指被依靠四大界的命根所保护。这确实是业生色的保护相。以色、香、味等:用“等”字把食素也包括进来,或者读作“色、香、味、食素”。成就所依和门:就是按各自的情况成就所依和门的状态。对眼识来说,因为它以眼为依靠,所以眼是它的所依;因为它是从眼这个入口生起的,所以眼也是它的门。至于领受等心,一直到彼所缘心路结束,因为它们依靠的是其他东西,所以眼只是它们的门,不是它们的所依。以虱头相等的量:意思是说,以虱头那么大的区域为范围,或者安住在虱头那么大的地方。住立:就是遍满七层眼膜而住立,像油浸透七层棉膜一样。这样,眼由许多色聚构成这一点就成立了。因为即使排除了膜的障碍,眼仍然存在。就像眼一样,应当知道,作为它依靠的四大界以及寿命、色等,也是遍满七层眼膜而住立的,因为它们不可分离。巴利
653-5.Sandhāraṇā…pe… hutvānāti sandhāraṇanahāpanamaṇḍanabījanakiccāhi catūhi dhātīhi khattiyakumāro viya sandhāraṇābandhanaparipācanasamudīraṇakiccāhi attanissayabhūtāhi catūhi dhātūhi katūpakāraṃ hutvā. Utucittādināti tīhi santatisamuṭṭhāpakehi utucittāhārehi. Ettha ca kalāpantaragatā utuāhārā adhippetāti vadanti. Āyunā katapālananti catudhātunissiteneva jīvitindriyena rakkhiyamānaṃ. Tathā hetaṃ kammajarūpaparipālanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vaṇṇagandharasādīhīti ādi-ggahaṇena ojaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vaṇṇagandharasojāhī’’ti vā pāṭho. Vatthudvārañca sādhayanti yathāyogaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇassa hi nissayabhāvato vatthubhāvaṃ, pavattimukhabhāvato dvārabhāvañca sādheti. Sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pana tadārammaṇāvasānānaṃ aññanissitattā dvārabhāvameva sādheti, na vatthubhāvaṃ. Ūkāsirasamānena pamāṇenāti ūkāsirasamānena padesappamāṇena lakkhitaṃ hutvā ūkāsirasamānappamāṇe ṭhāneti vā attho. Tiṭṭhatīti satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Evañca katvā cakkhussa anekakalāpagatatā siddhā hoti. Upaddavānaṃ paṭalanirākaraṇepi hi cakkhu vijjatevāti. Yathā ca cakkhu, evamimassa nissayabhūtā catasso dhātuyo, āyuvaṇṇādīni ca satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā ṭhitāneva avinibbhogavuttittāti gahetabbaṃ.
656 “已说”是指法将(舍利弗)所说的。“见诸色”中的“ma”是连音字,就像“aññamaññaṃ samaṇamacalo”等中的用法一样。或者,“manu”就是“有情”的意思。虽然眼并不见色,真正见色的是依于眼的识。正如“床发出喊声”这类说法,把依处的行为说成是依处本身的行为,所以说“以眼净色而见”。阿阇梨光护长老也正是基于这个意思才这样说。这里的定论是:是眼见色,还是识见色?对此,如果是眼见,那么具有其他识的有情也应该能见。如果是识见,那么因为识没有障碍,也应该能看见被墙等隔开的东西?这个过失不成立。对于主张“眼见”的人来说,也并非一切眼都能见,而是只有识所依止的眼才能见。对于主张“识见”的人来说,也并非一切识都能见,而是只有依于眼的识才能见,而且这种识不会在被隔开的地方生起。如果光线被墙等挡住,那里就没有光;但如果那里没有遮挡,比如在水晶、云母片等情况下,那么即使被隔开,识也仍然会生起,所以因为识没有生起,就不能看见被隔开的东西。这里的定论正是:眼识能见。因为眼识才执行“看”的功能。如果是这样,那为什么说“以眼见色”呢?这里的意思是:以眼为门、为工具。或者,依处的行为被说成是依处本身的行为,就像“床发出喊声”那样。如虱头之喻,就是与虱头相等之喻,意思是虱头那样的大小。这是就它所安立的处所来说的,而不是就它自身的量来说。因为若以极微为边际来衡量,它极其微细。然而,它是在虱头量大小的区域里生起。不仅这个眼,一切处色也都在那里生起。而这个眼在那里生起时,是遍满那个区域才生起的。它以四十九种聚一起生起,因为色法有十七个心识刹那的寿命,而且每一个心的三个刹那中,业生色都在生起。巴利
656.Vuttanti dhammasenāpatinā vuttaṃ. Rūpāni manupassatīti ma-kāro padasandhikaro ‘‘aññamaññaṃ samaṇamacalo’’tiādīsu viya. Atha vā manūti maccoti attho. Kiñcāpi cakkhu rūpaṃ na passati, kiñcarahi tannissitaṃ viññāṇameva. Tathā hi ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’tiādīsu viya nissitakiriyaṃ nissaye viya katvā vohārasambhavato ‘‘cakkhupasādena passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācariyajotipālattherenāpi hi imināva adhippāyena idaṃ vuttaṃ. Idamettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ, kiṃ cakkhu rūpaṃ passati, udāhu viññāṇanti, kiñcettha – yadi cakkhu passeyya, aññaviññāṇasamaṅginopi cakkhu passeyya. Atha viññāṇaṃ, kuṭṭādiantaritampi passeyya tassa appaṭighātattā? Nāyaṃ doso. Yassa ‘‘cakkhu passatī’’ti mataṃ, tassāpi na sabbaṃ cakkhu passati, atha kho viññāṇādhiṭṭhitameva. Yassa pana viññāṇaṃ passatīti mataṃ, tassāpi na sabbaṃ viññāṇaṃ passati, atha kho cakkhunissitameva, tañca antarite nuppajjati. Yattha ālokassa kuṭṭādīhi vinibandho, yattha pana so natthi phalikaabbhapaṭalādimhi, tattha antaritepi uppajjati eva, tasmā taṃ anuppannattā antaritaṃ na passati. Idameva ca sanniṭṭhānaṃ, yaṃ kho cakkhuviññāṇaṃ passatīti. Tañhi dassanakiccaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti. Tena dvārena karaṇabhūtenāti ayamettha abhisandhi. Atha vā nissitakiriyā nissayassa pavuccati yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Ūkāsirasamūpamanti ūkāsirasamānūpamaṃ, ūkāsirappamāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañcassa patiṭṭhānokāsavasena vuttaṃ, na pana attano pamāṇavasena. Tañhi paramāṇupariyantena pamāṇena atisukhumamevāti. Ūkāsirappamāṇe pana padese idaṃ pavattati. Na kevalañca idameva, sabbānipi sabbaṭṭhānikarūpāni tattha pavattanteva. Idañca tattha nibbattantaṃ taṃ padesaṃ pūretvā eva nibbattati. Ekūnapaṇṇāsakalāpavasena ca saheva pavattati, sattarasacittakkhaṇāyukattā rūpānaṃ, ekekassa ca cittassa tīsu tīsu khaṇesu kammajarūpānaṃ uppajjamānattā.
657 “听”是指耳朵在听。这里要问:到底是什么在听?是耳朵在听,还是识在听?应当按前面说过的方式,根据具体情况来配合解释。“为纤细铜色毛所积聚”是指在有辅助条件的耳孔内部,由微细的铜色毛所积聚。“在如指节形状之处”是指在像指环形状的肉所连接的地方。“以所说方式”是指以支持等作用。“为寿所护养”在这里应当和“为颜色等所围绕”联系起来理解。“住立”是指按前面所说的方式,充满那个地方而住立。其余部分应按已说的方式理解。“嗅”是指执取香气。“尝”是指感受味道。“唤求命”在这里,因为吞咽以执取味道为根本,所以以命为因的吞咽味道就是命,它唤求命,由于倾向于那个,就好像在唤求一样。“在如莲瓣尖形状之处”是指在中间被切断的莲瓣尖端形状的地方。“垢”是指烦恼等垢,以及在有漏法中趋向于垢的所缘的无上性;在由欲贪为因的业所生的鼻、舌、身中,以及在作为欲贪殊胜缘的鼻、舌、身中,由于身特别是有漏的缘,所以它就称为它们的来源。因此,享受触乐的众生也从事淫欲。或者,以身根为依处的四蕴,由于是强力欲贪等的因,所以特别称为垢,这是它们的来源,即因,因此称为身。“在此身中”是指在这个具有辅助条件的身体中。因为此身也是头发等种种垢的来源,所以称为身。“凡有所执取者存在”以此说明在发尖、爪尖等处没有身净色。“如棉层中的油”以此说明它的无间隔性。又,这些眼等诸根,应当看作像倾向于蚁冢、水、虚空、村落、尸林的蛇、鳄鱼、鸟、狗、豺狼一样,因为它们倾向于色等所缘,即倾向于称为蚁冢、水、虚空、村落、尸林的所缘。也就是说:眼因为喜好不平处,就像喜欢蚁穴的蛇;耳因为喜好孔穴,就像喜欢水穴的鳄鱼;鼻因为喜好虚空,就像喜欢无碍虚空的鸟;舌因为喜好村落,就像喜欢村落的狗;身因为喜好执取之物,就像喜欢新尸林的豺狼。“喜好不平处”是就眼好像有不平的意乐而说的。或者,依具眼者的意乐,眼有不平的意乐。这个道理也适用于其余诸根。巴利
657.Suṇātīti sotanti ettha kiṃ sotaṃ suṇāti, udāhu viññāṇantiādinā heṭṭhā vuttanayena yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tanutambalomāciteti sasambhārasotabilassa anto sukhumehi tambavaṇṇalomehi sañcite. Aṅgulivedhakasaṇṭhāne padeseti aṅgulimuddikāsaṇṭhānamaṃsayutte padese. Vuttappakārāhīti sandhāraṇādikiccāhi. Āyunā paripāliyamānanti ettha vaṇṇādīhi parivāritanti sambandhitabbaṃ. Tiṭṭhatīti pubbe vuttanayena taṃ padesaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati. Sesaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ghāyatīti gandhopādānaṃ karoti. Sāyatīti rasaṃ vindati. Jīvitamavhāyatīti ettha rasaggahaṇamūlakattā ajjhoharaṇassa jīvitanimittaṃ ajjhoharaṇaraso jīvitaṃ, taṃ avhāyati tasmiṃ ninnatāya avhāyantamiva hoti. Uppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padeseti majjhe chinnassa uppaladalassa aggabhāgasaṇṭhāne padese. Malānanti kilesādimalānañceva malavisayānañca sāsavadhammānaṃ anuttariyabhāvaṃ gacchantesu kāmarāganidānakammajanitesu kāmarāgassa ca visesapaccayesu ghānajivhākāyesu kāyassa visesato sāsavapaccayattā soyeva tesaṃ āyoti vuccati. Tena hi phoṭṭhabbasukhaṃ assādentā sattā methunampi sevanti. Atha vā kāyindriyavatthukā cattāro khandhā balavakāmarāgādihetubhāvato visesato malā, tesamayaṃ āyo hetūti kāyoti vutto. Imasmiṃ kāyeti imasmiṃ sasambhārakāye. Sopi hi kucchitānaṃ kesādimalānaṃ āyabhāvato kāyoti vuccati. Yāvatā upādinnakaṃ atthīti iminā kesagganakhaggādīsu kāyapasādassa abhāvamāha. Kappāsapaṭale sneho viyāti imināssa nirantarabhāvaṃ. Ime ca pana cakkhādayo rūpādigocaraninnatāya vammikaudakaākāsagāmasivathikāsaṅkhātagocaraninnatāya ahisuṃsumārapakkhikukkurasigālā viya daṭṭhabbā. Visamajjhāsayatāya hi cakkhu vammikacchiddābhiratasappo viya, bilajjhāsayatāya sotaṃ udakabilābhiratasuṃsumāro viya, ākāsajjhāsayatāya ghānaṃ ajaṭākāsābhiratapakkhi viya, gāmajjhāsayatāya jivhā gāmābhiratakukkuro viya, upādinnakajjhāsayatāya kāyo āmakasusānābhiratasigālo viyāti. Visamajjhāsayatāyāti cakkhussa visamajjhāsayaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttā. Cakkhumato vā puggalassa ajjhāsayavasena cakkhu visamajjhāsayaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi.
在这里,“想要见”就是渴望见到,这种状态叫“欲见性”,它是色贪的另一个名称。然而,它以对未来眼等过患作覆蔽的无明为根,以希求为自性,分明显的和不明显的两种。其中,那种在造业之前或之后生起的想法——“愿有这样或那样的眼,能够取到最微细的所缘”——这是明显的。另一种则是不去特别关注根的优劣,只是笼统地希求或不希求拥有圆满的处所和生存状态,在那里以未离贪的方式造业,由于贪爱未断而潜藏在心中,成为业种种差别的因,这是不明显的。这两种都是其因和亲依止,凡以彼为因、以彼为亲依止者,那业本身就是以欲见为因的业,它们是业的生起之源,所以称为“以欲见为因的业所生”;如此存在的净色,就是“欲见……净色”,这是它的相;或者说,这样成就之后被了知,所以称为“以欲见为因的业所生之净色相”。巴利
Daṭṭhu…pe… lakkhaṇanti ettha daṭṭhuṃ kāmetīti daṭṭhukāmo tassa bhāvo daṭṭhukāmatā, rūpataṇhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sā pana anāgate cakkhādīsu ādīnavapaṭicchādikāvijjāmūlapatthanāsabhāvā pākaṭā apākaṭāti duvidhā. Tattha yā ayaṃ ‘‘īdisaṃ īdisañca sukhumatamavisayaggahaṇasamatthaṃ cakkhu hotū’’ti evaṃ kammāyūhanato pubbe, pacchā vā uppannā pākaṭā. Indriyavisesaṃ pana anāmasitvā avisesena paripuṇṇāyatanabhavasampattiṃ patthetvā, apatthetvā vā tattha avigatataṇhāvasena kammaṃ karontassa appahīnabhāvena anusayitā api kammasāmatthiyavicittahetubhūtā apākaṭā. Sā duvidhāpi nidānaṃ upanissayo yassa taṃ daṭṭhukāmatānidānaṃ, tadeva kammaṃ, taṃ samuṭṭhānametesanti daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammasamuṭṭhānāni, evaṃvidhānaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasādo daṭṭhukāmatā…pe… pasādo, taṃ lakkhaṇamassa, tathā hutvā lakkhīyatīti vā daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammasamuṭṭhānabhūtapasādalakkhaṇaṃ.
在这里,对于胎生者来说,所给予结生的业或者其他业,会产生眼等诸根。而对于化生者,他们在结生的那一刹那就具足诸根而生起,应当这样理解:只是那个产生结生的业,就产生了完整圆满的身体。那么,由同一个业所产生的眼等诸根,为什么会有差别呢?因为因有差别。也就是说,作为对各个存在状态的渴求的那种渴爱,由于对各个存在状态所包含的处的欲求,自身就是多种多样的,它以亲依止的方式,让产生各个存在状态的业也变成多种多样的。因此,被赋予了某种特殊性质的业,由于与那种功能相应,就像显现为多种形态一样,产生出具有种种殊胜性质的果。在这里,不应该认为在功能与无功能的自性之外还有其他什么。因为由因的差别而被赋予特殊性质的业,具有产生殊胜果的功能,而且同一个业能成为产生十六种等异熟的因,这个道理应当接受。在世间,也能看到同一个稻种成为产生饱满和不饱满米粒的因。何必做这种推理思考呢?这本来就不应该思考。因为业果就是眼等诸根,而业异熟完全只是诸佛智慧的对象,不是其他人所能了知的,因为它不是推理所能触及的领域。正因为如此,世尊在开示了它的过患之后,予以遮止:“业异熟不可思议,不应思惟,若思惟者,将遭受狂乱、恼害。”巴利
Ettha ca gabbhaseyyakānaṃ dinnapaṭisandhikaṃ, aññaṃ vā kammaṃ cakkhādīni nibbatteti. Opapātikānaṃ pana paṭisandhikkhaṇeva paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ nibbattamānānaṃ paṭisandhijanakameva kammaṃ paripuṇṇasakalamattabhāvaṃ nibbattetīti gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana ekakammunā nibbattamānānaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ visesoti? Kāraṇassa bhinnattā. Taṃtaṃbhavapatthanābhūtā hi taṇhā taṃtaṃbhavapariyāpannāyatanābhilāsatāya sayaṃ vicittarūpā upanissayabhāvena taṃtaṃbhavanibbattakakammassapi vicittabhedataṃ vidahati. Yato tadāhitavisesaṃ tathāvidhasamatthatāyogena anekarūpāpannaṃ viya anekavisiṭṭhasabhāvaṃ phalaṃ nibbatteti, na cettha samatthatāsamatthatāsabhāvato aññā veditabbā. Kāraṇavisesena āhitavisesassa visiṭṭhaphalanipphādanasamatthatābhāvato ekasseva kammassa soḷasādivipākanibbattanahetubhāvena ca ayamattho sampaṭicchitabbo. Lokepi ekasseva sālibījassa paripuṇṇāparipuṇṇataṇḍulaphalanibbattihetutā dissateva. Kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāya, na cintitabbamevetaṃ. Yato kammaphalaṃ cakkhādīni, kammavipāko ca sabbaso buddhānaṃyeva ñāṇassa visayo, na aññesaṃ atakkāvacarattā. Teneva bhagavatā ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo, na cintetabbo, yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’tiādīnavaṃ (a. ni. 4.77) dassetvā paṭikkhittaṃ.
在诸色中,它有牵引的作用,意思是说:它对这个人,或者对转向等识,成为使其趋向那里的原因。它表现为所依的状态,因为它是依止缘。因为眼识虽然有时依靠光明等条件才生起,但在生起的那一刻,它只依靠眼根才生起。这里有人问:在眼识生起的时候,在可能存在的弱、中、强三种四十九种眼中,哪一种眼承受着眼识的所依状态呢?回答说:巴利
Rūpesu āviñchanarasanti āviñchanaṃ puggalassa, āvajjanādiviññāṇassa vā tanninnabhāvappattiyā hetubhāvo. Ādhārabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānanti nissayapaccayabhāvato. Ālokādisannissayena kadāci uppajjamānānampi hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjanakāle cakkhuṃ nissāya eva uppajjatīti. Etthāha – cakkhuviññāṇuppattisamaye sambhavantesu mandāmandamajjhimāyukesu ekūnapaṇṇāsacakkhūsu katamaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa ādhārabhāvaṃ paccanubhotīti? Vuccate –
在结生心生起的那一刹那,依止于已生起、已到达住立状态的先前所依处,第二个有分心生起;再依止与它一起生起、已到达住立状态的先前所依处,第三个有分心生起。按照这个道理,应当知道直到寿命结束为止的心识流转。巴利
‘‘Paṭisandhicittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ ṭhānappattaṃ purejātaṃ vatthuṃ nissāya dutiyabhavaṅgaṃ uppajjati, tena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ ṭhānappattaṃ purejātaṃ vatthuṃ nissāya tatiyabhavaṅgaṃ uppajjati, iminā nayena yāvatāyukaṃ cittappavatti veditabbā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.700) –
在《道非道智见》的释义中,按照所说的方式,眼在经过一个心识刹那之后撞击到色境,就成为识的依止。因此,这里的意思是:在两个有分心波动的过程中,与作为前者的无间缘的有分心同时生起。这个意思在锡兰古注以及《清净道论》的锡兰注中都有说明。巴利
Maggāmaggañāṇaniddese vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇātītaṃ cakkhu rūpe ghaṭṭitvā viññāṇassa nissayo hoti, tasmā dvīsu bhavaṅgacalanesu purimassa anantarapaccayabhūtena bhavaṅgacittena saha uppannanti ayamattho idha sīhaḷasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ, visuddhimaggassa sīhaḷasaṃvaṇṇanāyañca vutto.
住在塔拉卡村根本寺的达塔那伽长老说:“眼根与转向心,或者与作为它无间缘的有分心同时生起。”这种说法是错的。因为如果这样,就等于说:当另一个(色境)撞击时,会有另一个眼根成为眼识的依止。而且这样一来,从有分心波动以下,直到与第十三心同时生起的眼根,也都会成为依止——但这不能这么说。因为从第三、第四心开始生起的眼根,由于已经灭去,不能成为某些路心的门;而意门也是已灭去的才能成为门,从这一点可以看出。
如果说:“依止于结生心生起的那个刹那所生的所依处,第二个有分心生起”等等,从这种说法来看,其意思是“只经过一个心识刹那的所依才是依止”,那么“只经过一个心识刹那的所依”这句话本身是说得通的。如果这样,那么“与作为它无间缘的有分心”这个说法也能成立,但这样一来,就等于承认“经过两个心识刹那的所依也是依止”了。所以,这看起来并不是这位大长老的本意。
所谓“经过一个心识刹那”,是因为没有经过一个心识刹那的(所依)力量微弱,为了说明经过一个心识刹那后它变得有力,才这么说;并不是说经过两个、三个、四个心识刹那的所依就没有依止性。法护长老也是这样说的:“领受心等临近死亡时,因为此后不再生起业生色,所以只在同一个心所依处中生起。”因此,那只是这位大长老个人的想法,不应把它当作正理来接受。巴利
Taḷākagāmamūlavāsidāṭhānāgattherena pana ‘‘āvajjanena, tassa anantarapaccayabhūtena bhavaṅgena vā saha uppannaṃ cakkhu’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ duvuttaṃ. Evañhi sati aññasmiṃ ghaṭṭite aññaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti, evañca bhavaṅgacalanato heṭṭhā tatiyacatutthehi yāva terasamacittena saha uppannampi nissayo hotīti āpajjeyya, na cetaṃ vattabbaṃ, tatiyacatutthacittato paṭṭhāya uppannaṃ kesañci vīthicittānaṃ dvārabhāvaṃ na gacchati niruddhattā , manodvārassa niruddhasseva dvārabhāvassa dassanato. Yadi siyā ‘‘paṭisandhicittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ vatthuṃ nissāya dutiyabhavaṅgaṃ uppajjatī’’tiādivacanato ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇātītameva nissayoti adhippeta’’nti idampi ekacittakkhaṇātītaṃ nissayoti yujjatīti, evaṃ sati ‘‘tassa anantarapaccayabhūtena bhavaṅgena vā’’ti vacanaṃ yujjeyya, tena hi ‘‘cittakkhaṇadvayātītampi nissayo’’ti paṭiññātaṃ siyā, tasmā nāyaṃ therassa adhippāyoti dissati. ‘‘Ekacittakkhaṇātikkamo’’ti ca anatītekacittakkhaṇassa dubbalatāya ekacittakkhaṇātikkamena tassa balavabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuccati, na pana dviticatucittakkhaṇātītānaṃ nissayabhāvābhāvato. Evañca katvā vuttaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘sampaṭicchanādīni cutiāsannāni taduddhaṃ kammajarūpassa anuppattito ekasmiṃyeva hadayavatthusmiṃ vattantī’’ti, tasmā taṃ therassa manorathamevāti na sārato paccetabbaṃ.
在众多同时生起的净色中,是只有一个作为依止,还是全部都是依止?不是说过“即使一个眼也能成为眼识的缘”吗?那么,是哪一个呢?就是其中变得明净、能够被色境撞击的那一个。不过,《清净道论》的锡兰注释中说“全部都是依止”,并且说:“如果这样的话,那么就像‘缘眼与色,眼识生起’这句话里,‘色’用的是复数,这里‘眼’也应该像‘色’一样用复数。”为了澄清这个疑问,注释接着说:“为了破除‘依于具备资具的双眼中的两个净色,只生起一个识’这种错误见解,世尊没有用复数,而是像‘色处对眼识界及其相应诸法,以所缘缘为缘’等处那样,以总说的方式用了单数。”然而,法护长老不接受锡兰注释的这个说法,他说:“即使一个眼也能成为眼识的缘,而色则必定是多个,因为作为缘的性质有差别。”我们在前面也已经说明了这一点。正因为那些大种是这个净色的近因,所以说“见……为足处”。耳净色等的相、味等解说,应当依照前面所说的方式类推理解其义。巴利
Sahajātesu bahūsu pasādesu kiṃ eko nissayo hoti, udāhu sabbeyevāti? Nanu vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbe ekampi cakkhu viññāṇassa paccayo hotī’’ti, katamaṃ pana tanti? Yaṃ tattha visadaṃ hutvā rūpābhighaṭṭanārahaṃ. Visuddhimaggasīhaḷasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘sabbeyeva nissayā hontī’’ti vatvā ‘‘yadi evaṃ ‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’nti ettha ‘rūpe cā’ti vacanaṃ viya ‘cakkhūnī’tipi bahuvacanaṃ kattabbanti anuyogaṃ katvā taṃvisodhanatthaṃ ‘sasambhāracakkhudvayanissitaṃ pasādadvayaṃ nissāya ekameva viññāṇaṃ uppajjatīti gaṇheyyu’nti imaṃ vippaṭipattiṃ nirākarontena bhagavatā bahuvacanamakatvā ‘rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’tiādīsu (paṭṭhā. 1.1.2) viya sāmaññavasena ekavacanaṃ kata’’nti vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana tadeva sīhaḷasaṃvaṇṇanāvacanaṃ anicchantena ‘‘ekampi cakkhu viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpaṃ pana anekameva paccayabhāvavisesato’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā ceva amhehipi heṭṭhā vibhāvitanti. Yesaṃ bhūtānamayaṃ pasādo, teyeva imassa āsannakāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘daṭṭhu…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sotapasādādīnampi lakkhaṇādiniddese vuttanayānusārena attho yojetabbo.
658 “某些”是指大众部中的一部分人。为了说明眼等处的火界等增胜,也就是指作为它们所依的大种中那个界增胜,所以说了“火界增胜的”等话。其中,“火界增胜的”是说:虽然从分量上看四大是均等的,但从作用上看,火界增胜。其余几项也是这样类推。虚空……等等……其余的:虚空界增胜的大种,它的净色是耳;风界增胜的,是鼻;水界增胜的,是舌;被称为触的地界增胜的,是身。这就是这里的意思。巴利
658.Kecīti mahāsaṅghiyesu ekacce. Cakkhādīsu tejādiadhikatā nāma tannissayabhūtānaṃ tadadhikatāyāti dassento ‘‘tejādhikāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha tejādhikānanti pamāṇavasena catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ samānabhāvepi kiccavasena tejodhātuadhikānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Ākāsa…pe… sesakāti ākāsādhikānaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasādo sotaṃ, vāyuadhikānaṃ ghānaṃ, toyādhikānaṃ jivhā, phoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātapathavādhikānaṃ kāyoti attho.
659 对于这样主张的人,什么能胜过呢?回答说“他们……”等等。“请把经拿来”:不能只凭你们一句话就相信这个意思,请拿出能说明这个意思的经来。他的意思是:如果把经拿来了,就可以考察它到底是需要引申解释的还是意思已经明确的;如果依据这部经能看出这个意思,我们就接受。“即使……任何一点”:他们就算到处去找经,也绝对找不到哪怕一首偈颂、一句经文能说明这个意思,因为三藏佛语中根本不存在这样的经。巴利
659. Evaṃ pana vadantānaṃ kiṃ uttaranti āha ‘‘te panā’’tiādi. Suttaṃ āharathāti na tumhākaṃ vacanamatteneva ayamattho sakkā saddhātuṃ, tassa pana paridīpakaṃ suttamāharatha. Sutte hi āhaṭe tassa neyyatthataṃ nītatthataṃ vicāretvā yadi tassa vasena ayamattho paññāyetha , gaṇheyyāma nanti adhippāyo. Suttameva…pe… kiñcipīti ito cito ca suttaṃ gavesamānāpi addhā ekantena kiñcipi ekagāthāpadamattampi tadatthaparidīpakaṃ suttaṃ na dakkhissanteva tepiṭake buddhavacane tādisasseva suttantassa abhāvato.
660 就算有人说,从经藏的角度看不到这个意思,但从道理上却看得出来,那也照样不成立。为了说明这一点,论主说“若有差别……”等等。因为,如果诸大种有差别,净色怎么能生起呢?绝不可能生起。是什么原因呢?论主说“因为诸大种均等时,净色才被阐明”。古师们所阐明的正是:只有诸大种均等时才有净色,不均等时就没有。因为地界偏多的聚,由于坚硬;水界偏多的聚,由于流动;火界偏多的聚,由于被执取;风界偏多的聚,由于散动,净色在这些当中都无法立足。所以,只有作用上均等的诸大种,净色才能生起,不均等的诸大种则不能。巴利
660. Kiñcāpi suttantavasena ayamattho na dissati, yuttito pana dissatīti ce, tampi natthīti dassento āha ‘‘visese satī’’tiādi. Bhūtānañhi visese sati pasādo kathaṃ bhave, neva bhaveyya, na ca bhaveyya, kiṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘samānānañhi bhūtānaṃ, pasādo paridīpito’’ti. Yasmā samānānameva bhūtānaṃ pasādo porāṇehi paridīpito, na visamānānaṃ. Pathavīdhātuadhikakalāpassa hi kakkhaḷattā, āpodhātuadhikakalāpassa vissandanato, tejodhātuadhikakalāpassa pariggayhamānattā, vāyodhātuadhikakalāpassa ca vissaraṇato na tesu pasādo patiṭṭhātuṃ sakkoti, tasmā tesaṃ kiccato samānānaṃyeva pasādo uppajjeyya, na visamānānanti.
661-2 如果这样,那么诸根的差别又是怎么回事?回答“因此”等。既然按前面所说的方式,不能说依处之界的诸界有差别,那就应当彻底舍弃“这些作为诸根所依的界中,这个少、那个多”这类关于差别的臆想,而应了知:诸根的差别是由业的差别造成的。就像即使诸界没有差别,色法中的味等也彼此不同;同样,眼等诸根即使没有诸界的差别,也彼此不同。不过这种殊胜性应当通过业的差别来了知。因为即使是一种业,当它作为希求五处有身的果报而成熟时,由于它是眼等差别的原因,就以其作用力的差别而与其他业不共。使眼生起的那个差别,并不会同样使耳生起,因为已经成了不同的根。依据“在结生刹那,广大的思以业缘为缘,对业生色起作用”这一说法,可以知道:在结生刹那,一个思对当时存在的一切业生色都成为业缘。因为如果那时是由不同的思使诸根生起,那么业生色就会由小业和广大业共同造成,但一个结生不可能由多种业产生,所以可以成立:由一个业产生多种根。“并不是由诸界的差别而有诸根的差别”,这是作为结论说的。巴利
661-2. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ pasādānaṃ visesatāti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Yasmā vuttappakārena pasādavatthukānaṃ bhūtānaṃ visesena na bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā etesaṃ pasādanissayabhūtānaṃ idamūnaṃ, idamadhikanti etaṃ visesaparikappanaṃ sabbaso sabbākārena pahāya ñeyyā kammavisesena pasādānaṃ visesatā. Yathā avisesepi bhūtānaṃ rūpānaṃ rasādayo aññamaññavisadisā honti, evaṃ cakkhādayopi bhūtavisesābhāvepi aññamaññavisadisā honti. So panāyaṃ visiṭṭhabhāvo kammavisesena viññātabbo. Ekampi hi kammaṃ pañcāyatanikattabhāvapatthanānipphannaṃ cakkhādivisesahetutāya aññamaññassa asādhāraṇavisiṭṭhaṃ sāmatthiyavisesato. Na hi yena visesena cakkhussa paccayo, teneva sotassa hoti indriyantarabhāvappattito. ‘‘Paṭisandhikkhaṇe mahaggatā cetanā kaṭattārūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti vacanato paṭisandhikkhaṇe vijjamānānaṃ sabbesaṃyeva kaṭattārūpānaṃ ekā cetanā kammapaccayo hotīti viññāyati. Nānācetanāya hi tadā indriyuppattiyaṃ sati parittena ca mahaggatena ca kammena kaṭattārūpaṃ āpajjeyya, na cekā paṭisandhi anekakammanibbattā hotīti siddhamekena kammena anekindriyuppatti hotīti. ‘‘Na hi bhūtavisesena, hoti tesaṃ visesatā’’ti idaṃ nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
663 663. 为了说明“在这些由业差别而殊胜的诸根中,取境也有差别”,所以说了“如是于这些中”等话。“未至而取”就是不接触而取,因为它和自身的所依一起,并不附着于所依,而是作为在色等境上生起识的因。不过有些人说“它也是接触而取”,这并不妥当,因为它对于有间隔的和超量的境,也是生起识的因。如果眼和耳只取接触到的境,那么对于与眼净色隔开一段距离的星星等,以及相对于所依来说超量的月轮等色处;对于与耳净色隔开、被腹皮和关节皮等隔开的腹中声、关节声等,以及广大的海声等声处,识就不应该生起。因为像身根等那样接触而取的诸根,看不到有这种情况。巴利
663. Evaṃ kammavisesato visiṭṭhesu ca etesu ārammaṇaggahaṇepi ayaṃ visesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘evametesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Appattagāhakanti asampattaggāhakaṃ attano nissayena saha anallīyananissaye eva rūpādivisaye viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato. Keci pana tampi ‘‘sampattaggāhakamevā’’ti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ sāntare adhike ca visaye viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato. Yadi hi cakkhusotāni sampattavisayameva gaṇhanti, cakkhupasādato vicchinnadese ṭhitesu tārakādīsu nissayavasena ca pamāṇato adhikesu candamaṇḍalādīsu rūpāyatanesu sotapasādato ca vicchinnadesasambhūtesu udaracammasandhicammādiantaritesu kucchisaddasandhisaddādīsu puthulesu ca samuddasaddādīsu saddāyatanesu viññāṇuppatti na siyā sampattaggāhakānaṃ kāyindriyādīnaṃ tathā adassanato.
这里也许有人会说:根是在依止处之外发挥作用的,所以它只取已经接触到的境,并且是遍满与所取境相当的范围而取,因此“它在有间隔和超出的境上也能作为识生起的因”这个说法就不成立了。这不对,因为根根本不会在依止处之外生起。根只在依止处活动,因为在那里才能看到它的作用等运作方式。如果它能在外面活动,那么即使依止处被遮住了,也应该还能取境。所以,正因为安住在依止处的眼和耳恰恰能取尚未到达的境,所以“它在有间隔和超出的境上也能作为识生起的因”这个说法并非不成立。因此古德们说:巴利
Ettha ca vadeyya – adhiṭṭhānato bahindriyassa pavatti hotīti sampattavisayameva yattakaṃ visayaṃ, tattakaṃ visayaṃ gahaṇākāraṃ pharitvā gaṇhāti, tasmā asiddhametaṃ ‘‘sāntare adhike ca visaye viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato’’ti? Taṃ na, adhiṭṭhānato bahi indriyuppattiyā eva abhāvā. Adhiṭṭhānadese eva hi indriyaṃ pavattati tattha kiccādippayogadassanato. Sati ca etassa bahi pavattiyaṃ adhiṭṭhāne pihitepi visayaggahaṇaṃ siyā, tasmā adhiṭṭhānadese ṭhitānaṃyeva cakkhusotānaṃ asampattavisayasseva gahaṇato nāsiddhametaṃ ‘‘sāntare adhike ca viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato’’ti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
即使在与一切境接触时,凡是在所见的色相中
被隔断的广大识,是现前执取的障碍。巴利
‘‘Sabbagocarayogepi, diṭṭhaṃ rūparavesu yaṃ; Vicchinnaputhuviññāṇaṃ, sampattaggāhabādhaka’’nti.
它的意思是:当一切眼等诸根与各自的境——色等相结合,即在作用相同、相互关联或相互接触这一点上相同时,对于那些在色处、声处等境中,因远离眼等诸根以及未被某种东西隔开而成为间断的、按大小来说宽广的境,所生起的识,对眼和耳来说,就是“接触而取”的障碍。巴利
Tassattho – sabbesaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ gocarena rūpādinā yoge ekakāriyasādhakattā sambandhe ghaṭṭane vā samāne sati rūparavesu rūpasaddāyatanesu visayabhūtesu cakkhādito dūrabhāvena ceva kenaci anantaritabhāvena ca vicchinnesu pamāṇato puthulesu ca visayesu uppajjamānaṃ yaṃ viññāṇaṃ, taṃ cakkhusotānaṃ sampattaggāhassa sampattaggahaṇassa bādhakanti.
再说,如果眼识是取“已经到达”的境,那它也应该能看见自己所在区域里的颜色。同样,它也应该能看见涂在眼睑上的眼药、睫毛根部的眼珠颜色,以及擦在睫毛根部的眼药棒,但这些都看不见。所以,眼识只取那些安住在非自己依止之处里的境。
耳处也是一样。如果耳识是取“已经到达”的境,那么心所生的声处就永远不可能成为耳识的所缘缘,因为心所生的法不会在外面生起。可是《发趣论》里不加区分地说:“声处以所缘缘为缘,对耳识界为缘。”也就是说,声音就是耳识的所缘。
再说,如果耳识是取“已经到达”的境,那么它只能取自己所在范围内的声音,这样一来,声音就会像香一样,无法确定方向位置。若真是这样,那循声射箭的射手,箭就应该只落在自己的耳孔里了。所以,声音在哪里生起,就站在那里,进入耳道,成为耳识的境。巴利
Apica yadi cakkhu sampattaggāhakaṃ siyā, attano maṇḍale ṭhitaṃ vaṇṇampi passeyya. Tathā akkhipuṭe añjanaṃ pakhumamūle akkhivaṇṇaṃ pakhumamūle ghaṭṭiyamānaṃ añjanasalākampi passeyya, na ca panetaṃ dissati, tasmā tannissaye dese ṭhitameva visayaṃ gaṇhāti. Sotāyatanampi yadi sampattaggāhakaṃ abhavissa, cittasamuṭṭhānaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇassa kadācipi ārammaṇapaccayo na siyā. Na hi bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ uppatti atthi. Paṭṭhāne ca ‘‘saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇadhātuyā ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.2) aviseseneva saddassa sotaviññāṇārammaṇabhāvo vutto . Kiñca yadi sotaṃ sampattaggāhakaṃ siyā, attano visayapadeseyeva gahetabbato gandhassa viya saddassāpi disādesavavatthānaṃ na siyā. Evañca saddānusārena kaṇḍaṃ pātentassa saddavedhino attano kaṇṇabileyeva sarapātanaṃ siyā, tasmā yattha uppanno saddo, tattheva ṭhito sotapathe āpāthamāgacchati.
如果真是这样,那为什么远处染工等人的声音要过很久才听得到呢?因为如果耳识是“未至而取”的话,那么远近各处的声音应该在同一时间被听到才对。但事实并非如此,因为对远近不同的声音,取的方式会随其明显程度不同而有差别。就像对远近不同的说话声,取字音的清楚程度不同,有时取得到,有时取不到;同样,对染工等人的声音,近处的声音从开始到结束逐步变得明显,远处的声音则在结束时,或者在中间以整体一团的方式变得明显。随着这种明显程度,在确定取者的耳识过程之后生起的意门速行,因为取的方式有差别,就会生起“很轻松就听到了”或者“很久才听到”的想法。可是,耳识的生起在两种情况下其实是一样的,因为声音在它生起的地方停留,就在它自身存在的那个刹那进入耳的范围。如果声音不是通过大种相续向四周传播,那怎么会有回声产生呢?应当知道,远处的声音也能成为在其他地方产生回声、以及使器皿等震动的原因,就像磁石能使铁震动一样。巴利
Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ dūre ṭhitehi rajakādisaddā cirena suyyanti. Asampattaggāhakatte hi dūrāsannadesavattīnaṃ samakameva savanena bhavitabbanti? Nayidamevaṃ dūrāsannānaṃ yathāpākaṭe sadde gahaṇavisesato. Yathā hi dūrāsannānaṃ vacanasadde yathāpākaṭeva gahaṇavisesato akkharavisesanaṃ gahaṇaṃ, aggahaṇañca hoti, evaṃ rajakādisaddepi āsannassa ādito pabhuti yāva avasānā kamena pākaṭībhūte, dūrassa ca avasāne, majjhe vā piṇḍavasena pavattipākaṭībhūte yathāpākaṭaṃ nicchayaggāhakānaṃ sotaviññāṇavīthiyā parato pavattānaṃ manodvārikajavanānaṃ gahaṇavisesato lahukaṃ suto, cirena sutoti abhimāno hoti. Sotaviññāṇappavatti pana ubhayattha samānā saddassa uppannadese ṭhitassa attano vijjamānakkhaṇeyeva sotāpāthagamanato. Yadi saddassa bhūtaparamparāya samantato pavatti natthi, kathaṃ paṭighosuppattīti? Dūre ṭhitopi saddo aññattha paṭighosuppattiyā, bhājanādicalanassa ca paccayo hoti ayokanto viya ayocalanassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
其余部分……中略……所谓“执取者”:剩下那三种净色,也就是鼻、舌、身,它们取的是已经到达的所缘。这是因为它们既依所依之力,又因为自身作为识生起之因,唯当所缘依止于各自的所依时。香和味,在各自的所依中,唯有与鼻的所依、舌的所依一起依止时,才能被认知。而触境的三大种色,也唯有依止于身所依时,才能被认知。巴利
Sesaṃ…pe… gāhakanti yaṃ pana avasesaṃ ghānajivhākāyasaṅkhātaṃ pasādattayaṃ, taṃ sampattaggāhakaṃ hoti nissayavasena ceva sayañca attano nissaye allīneyeva visaye viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato. Gandharasānaṃ nissayesu ghānajivhānissayehi saha allīnāyeva gandharasā viññāyanti . Phoṭṭhabbañca bhūtattayarūpaṃ kāyanissayena allīnameva viññāyatīti.
“陷入容色变异”:由于嗔等因缘而生起不悦意的容色,因此陷入容色的变异。“到达内心的状态”:指心所趣向的意乐。“显示”:像色一样使它显现,意思是把它显示得仿佛有形体。因为界有多种含义,所以“色”这个词应当理解为“显示”之义。那与“色”的关联是这样。“在眼中,或者眼对它的撞击,这是它的特相”,所以是“眼撞击特相”。耳撞击特相等也是如此。这里,撞击是指所缘与能取者彼此面对面,如同有阻碍般的抵触。又作如此理解:如同有抵触时,弱者会有动摇,同样,当面对所缘时,能取者、与它相关联的实体色法,以及依止它的有分,都会有动摇。那色法在眼中,或者眼在色法中,是这样发生的。因此说:“在眼这个不可见有对法中,色是可显见有对法,或者被撞击;或者眼是不可见有对法,在色这个可显见有对法中,或者被撞击。”如此等等。所缘状态是所缘缘性。行境状态是现起。这里,所缘状态是不变易性,行境状态是多数性,这是所缘与行境的差别。“发出声音”:被举例,或者依自己的缘而被引导至耳识所能认知的状态,是为斯义。“散发自身气味”:好香或恶臭,或者显示自身。因此说“指示”。巴利
Vaṇṇavikāramāpajjamānanti dosādīhi kāraṇehi amanāpavaṇṇassa uppattivasena vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ. Hadayaṅgatabhāvanti cittagataṃ ajjhāsayaṃ. Pakāsetīti rūpamiva pakāsaṃ karoti, saviggahamiva dassetīti attho. Anekatthattā hi dhātūnaṃ pakāsanattho eva rūpa-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ pana rūpanti sambandho. Cakkhumhi, cakkhussa vā paṭihananaṃ lakkhaṇametassāti cakkhupaṭihananalakkhaṇaṃ. Evaṃ sotapaṭihananalakkhaṇantiādīsupi. Paṭihananañcettha visayavisayīnaṃ aññamaññābhimukhabhāvo yogyadesāvaṭṭhānaṃ paṭighāto viyāti katvā. Yathā paṭighāte sati dubbalassa calanaṃ hoti, evaṃ visayābhimukhabhāve sati visayino taṃsambandhassa ca vatthurūpassa, tannissitassa ca bhavaṅgassa calanaṃ hoti. So rūpassa cakkhumhi, cakkhussa vā rūpe hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yamhi cakkhumhi anidassanamhi sappaṭighamhi rūpaṃ sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ paṭihaññi vā, yaṃ cakkhu anidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ rūpamhi sanidassanamhi sappaṭighamhi paṭihaññi vā’’ti (dha. sa. 597) ca ādi. Visayabhāvo ārammaṇapaccayatā. Gocarabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānanti ettha anaññathābhāvo visayatā, tabbahulatā gocarabhāvoti ayaṃ visayagocarānaṃ viseso. Saddāyatīti udāharīyati, sakehi vā paccayehi sotaviññeyyabhāvaṃ upanīyatīti attho. Attānaṃ gandhayatīti sugandhaṃ, duggandhanti vā attānaṃ pakāseti. Tenāha ‘‘sūcayatī’’ti.
664 664. 女根只是女人自身的根。眼等诸根在男人身上也有,这个根却不是这样。这个根一定只存在于女人身上,所以称为“女根”。男根也是这样。女人的状态,就是“以这个而成为女人”,或者以这个作为心或名称,所以叫女性状态。“结生等起”:就是在结生时生起,与结生心在同一刹那生起。由此说明,除了性别转变的情况之外,这个根不像眼根等那样不显现。而“此女性相等”:就是作为根的果报的女性相、女性行、女性仪等。“等”字包含了女性相、女性行、女性仪。其中,手足等清晰或不清晰的形态是女性相。女人的手足、脖子、胸等形态不像男人那样:她们下半身清晰,上半身不清晰,手脚小,脸小,乳房不清晰,没有胡须与颊毛。发式和衣物的穿戴也是女性相。幼年时用精巧的玩具等玩耍、用木机纺线等,这些是女性行,意思是女性的行为。行止于不清晰之处等状态是女性仪。看到男人行止不清晰,也会说他像女人一样站、躺、坐、吃、嚼。然而诸位老师评说这女性相等之说明不善,另外作解释。怎样呢?女性相之处是女性相,贪欲之意欲是女性相,行止于不清晰之处等是女性行,女人的形态是女性仪。这里,意欲就是对男人的贪欲。这贪欲在她们身上总是强烈地生起,所以它也成为认知“女人”的相,因此称为女性相。虽然作为认知“女人”的相,行和仪也包含在相中,但因为分别取它们,所以只有贪欲之意欲被说为相。巴利
664. Itthiyā eva indriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ. Yathā cakkhādīni indriyāni purisassapi honti, nayidaṃ tathā. Idaṃ pana niyamena itthiyā eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘itthindriya’’nti vuccati. Evaṃ purisindriyepi. Itthiyā bhāvo, itthīti bhavati etena cittaṃ , abhidhānaṃ vāti itthibhāvo. Paṭisandhisamuṭṭhitoti paṭisandhiyaṃyeva samuṭṭhito, paṭisandhicittena saha ekakkhaṇe samuṭṭhito. Etena ṭhapetvā liṅgaparivattanaṃ cakkhundriyādīni viya imassa apātubhāvamāha. Yañcetaṃ itthiliṅgādīti yaṃ panetaṃ indriyaphalabhūtaṃ itthiliṅgādi. Ādi-ggahaṇena itthinimittaitthikuttaitthākappānaṃ saṅgaho. Tattha visadaavisadahatthapādāditā saṇṭhānaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ. Itthīnañhi hatthapādagīvāuraādisaṇṭhānaṃ na purisānaṃ viya hoti. Tathā hi tāsaṃ heṭṭhimakāyo visado, uparimakāyo avisado, hatthapādā khuddakā, mukhaṃ khuddakaṃ, thanamaṃsā avisadā, tā nimmassudāṭhikā. Kesabandhavatthaggahaṇañca itthinimittaṃ. Daharakālepi suppakamusalakādīhi kīḷā makacivākena suttakantananti ca evamādi itthikuttaṃ, itthikiriyāti attho. Avisadaṭṭhānagamanādiākāro itthākappo. Purisampi hi avisadaṃ disvā mātugāmo viya tiṭṭhati nipajjati nisīdati khādati bhuñjatīti vadanti. Idaṃ pana itthiliṅgādiparidīpanaṃ akusalanti vatvā aññathāpi vaṇṇenti ācariyā. Kathaṃ? Yonipadeso itthiliṅgaṃ, sarādhippāyā itthinimittaṃ, avisadaṭṭhānagamanādayo itthikuttaṃ, itthisaṇṭhānaṃ itthākappoti. Ettha ca adhippāyo nāma purisasmiṃ methunataṇhā. Sā hi tāsaṃ niccaṃ balavatarā pavattati, ato sāpi itthīti sañjānanassa nimittatāya ‘‘itthinimitta’’nti vuccati. Kiñcāpi itthīti saññāṇassa nimittatāya kuttākappānampi nimitteyeva antogadhatā, tathāpi tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇato sarādhippāyā eva nimittabhāvena adhippetā.
665 那么,这个女性性别等(女性征、女性相、女性行、女性仪)是不是像女根那样,是结生时等起的呢?论师说“依女根”等。确实,虽然女性性别等是依各自的业等缘而生起,但大多数情况下,它们只在有女根的相续中,以这样那样的形态出现;在没有女根的地方则不会生起。因此,根据它们与女根的有无关系,说它们“依女根而生”。这样说了之后,接下来还会说“女人……以因缘为现起”。正是通过这种称为因缘性的增上作用,才说它是根性,因为在有根的相续中,女性性别等形态的色法并非以其他方式生起,也不是从根等缘而生起。同样,它不像命根对于同一色聚中的诸法那样,也不像食物对于其他色聚的色法那样,是支撑或维护者。因此,就像命根和食物那样,这个根的缘性以及未离缘性,在巴利三藏中并没有被提及。因为女性性别等是依赖其他缘的,所以在它有增上作用的地方,在类似的死心所造色中也能看到那种形态。然而,这些女性性别等虽然依女根而生,但在胚胎的结生时并不生起,只在转起时才生起,因此说“于转起……非结生”。巴利
665. Kiṃ panetaṃ itthiliṅgādi itthindriyaṃ viya paṭisandhisamuṭṭhitaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘itthindriyaṃ paṭiccevā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi hi itthiliṅgādīni yathāsakaṃ kammādinā paccayena samuṭṭhahanti , yebhuyyena pana itthindriyasahiteyeva santāne taṃtadākārā hutvā sambhavanti, itarattha ca na bhavantīti tesaṃ tabbhāvabhāvitaṃ upādāya ‘‘itthindriyaṃ paṭicceva jāyantī’’ti vuttāni. Evañca katvā vakkhati ‘‘itthi…pe… kāraṇabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti. Īdiseneva kāraṇabhāvasaṅkhātena adhipatibhāvena tassa indriyatā vuttā indriyasahite santāne itthiliṅgādiākārarūpapaccayānaṃ aññathā anuppādanato, na pana indriyādipaccayasambhavato. Tathā hetaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ viya ekakalāpagatānaṃ āhāro viya kalāpantararūpānaṃ upatthambhakamanupālakaṃ vā na hoti. Evañca katvā jīvitindriyaāhārānaṃ viya imassa indriyapaccayatā, atthiavigatapaccayatā ca pāḷiyaṃ na vuttā. Yasmā paccayantarādhīnāni itthiliṅgādīni, tasmā yatthassa ādhipaccaṃ, taṃsadisesu matacittakatarūpesupi taṃsaṇṭhānatā dissati. Yasmā panete itthindriyaṃ paṭicca jāyantāpi gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ na samuṭṭhahanti, pavatteyeva samuṭṭhahanti, tasmā āha ‘‘pavatte…pe… paṭisandhiya’’nti.
666-7 不过,对于湿生和化生的众生,有些是在结生的当下就与女性根一起生起的。“非”字在这里是用来集合其他应说的内容,应当理解为“有些”。因为在性别特征等形态的色法中,色处是眼识所识知的,所以说“女性特征等是眼识所识知的”。而除此之外的其他那些,则按各自对应的情况,既是耳识所识知的,也是意识所识知的,因此说“或非”。上面所说的这些展开,也应当按同样方式套用到男性根上,论师为了指出这种类推而说“同样的道理”等。说到“在其余者中”,如果只说到这里,有人可能会想“是不是指这以外的全部”,所以明确说“在男性根中”。所谓“初劫之人”,指的是最初劫的人类。他们从光音天命终后投生到这里,经过漫长的时间,开始吃粗劣的食物,当大小便产生后,为了排泄,他们的疮口裂开,男人的男性特征和女人的女性特征就出现了。这是因为,由于过去生中修习近行定的力量,只要在有情相续中镇伏欲贪的力量还没有平息,以强力欲贪为依托的男女根就不会出现。但当由于定力中断,强力欲贪得到机会时,那些以欲贪为依托的男女根就在有情的相续中生起了。巴利
666-7. Saṃsedajaopapātikānaṃ pana kiñci itthindriyena saha paṭisandhiyameva nibbattati. Na cāti ca-kāro vacanīyantarasamuccaye. ‘‘Kiñcā’’ti imassa atthe daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā liṅgādiākāresu rūpesu rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, tasmā āha ‘‘itthiliṅgādayo cakkhuviññeyyā hontī’’ti. Yasmā pana tato aññāni yathāyogaṃ sotaviññeyyāni ceva manoviññeyyāni ca, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na vā’’ti. Yathāvutto papañco purisindriyepi yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabboti atidesaṃ karonto āha ‘‘esevā’’tiādi. Sesepīti ettakeyeva vutte ito sesesu sabbesupīti kadāci koci cinteyyāti āha ‘‘purisindriye’’ti . Paṭhamakappānanti paṭhamakappikanarānaṃ. Tesañhi ābhassaralokato cavitvā idhūpapannānaṃ dīghassa kālassa accayena oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharataṃ muttakarīsesu sañjātesu tesaṃ nikkhamanatthāya vaṇamukhāni bhijjanti, purisassa purisabhāvo, itthiyā ca itthibhāvo pāturahosi. Tathā hi purimattabhāvesu pavattaupacārajhānānubhāvena yāva sattasantāne kāmarāgavikkhambhanavego na paṭipassambhati, na tāva balavakāmarāgūpanissayāni itthipurisindriyāni pāturahesuṃ. Yadā panassa vicchinnatāya balavakāmarāgo laddhāvasaro ahosi, tadā tadūpanissayāni tāni sattānaṃ santāne sañjāyanti.
668 “之后”是指初劫之后。“在转起中……转变”这句话的意思是,就像那位苏雷亚长者之子的情况一样。而“api”这个词还说明:在初篇波罗夷的判例文中提到的比丘,以及像比丘尼那样在结生时就已生起异性根的情况,在转起中也会发生转变。正如所说的:巴利
668.Paratoti paṭhamakappato aparabhāge. Pavatte…pe… parivattatīti yathā taṃ soreyyakaseṭṭhiputtassa viyāti adhippāyo. Api-saddena paṭhamapārājikāyaṃ vinītavatthupāḷiyaṃ āgatabhikkhussa, bhikkhuniyā viya ca paṭisandhiyaṃ samuṭṭhitassapi pavatte parivattanaṃ dīpeti. Yathāha –
当时,有一位比丘身上出现了女性生殖器;当时,有一位比丘尼身上出现了男性生殖器。巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhūtaṃ hoti. Tena kho pana samayena aññatarissā bhikkhuniyā purisaliṅgaṃ pātubhūtaṃ hotī’’ti (pārā. 69).
如果有人在结生时,两种根里连一种都没有生起,这个人就叫作“无性人”,应当知道他在转起时也不会生起根。巴利
Yassa pana paṭisandhiyaṃ dvīsu ekampi na samuṭṭhitaṃ, so abhāvako nāma, tassa pavattiyampi indriyuppatti na hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
669 那么,这两者(生起与坏灭)的原因又是什么呢?为什么说它由此生起、由此转变?论师把这一追问放在心上,于是说“由大恶业……”等。其中,“大”指的是像通奸这样力量强大的恶业,它作为近依缘。“由大善业”这一句,是就善趣来说的。而在恶趣中,这两者的生起与坏灭都只由不善业产生。巴利
669. Kiṃ panetassa ubhayassapi nibbattiyā, vināsanassa ca kāraṇaṃ, yato idaṃ samuṭṭhāti, parivattatīti ca vuccatīti imaṃ anuyogaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘mahatā pāpakammenā’’tiādi. Tattha mahatāti paradārikakammādinā mahābalena. Pāpakammena upanissayabhūtena . Mahatā kusalenevāti idaṃ sugatiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Duggatiyaṃ pana ubhayampi akusalakammeneva jāyati.
670 670. 当根已经坏灭时,性征也必定随之坏灭,所以说“女性性征坏灭”。不过这里应当这样理解:在这两者当中,男性根是优胜的,女性根是低劣的。男性根的消失,是由强大的不善业造成的;它的生起,是由强大的善业造成的。女性根的消失,是由微弱的不善业造成的;它的生起,也是由微弱的善业造成的。但在恶趣中,两者的消失和生起都只由不善业造成。如果说在善趣中女性根也只由善业产生,那为什么还有“犯了与他人妻子私通的业,堕入地狱受苦,受完报之后,又凭着那恶业的力量,在人间五百次生为女人”这样的说法呢?这并不矛盾,因为那是就等流果来说的。事实上,在结生的时候,即使某个业本来有能力产生男性根,有时也会被与他人妻子私通等强有力的恶业压制住它的效力,那时它因为无力产生自己的男性根,就只能产生女性根。而在转起阶段,有时它凭自身的力量从结生开始就生起男性根,并以其强劲的状态排除了作为女性根近依的与他人妻子私通等不善业;但后来,当作为女性根近依的与他人妻子私通等业由于获得了各种条件而产生了特殊的力量,可能压制住它的效力时,那时它因为自身微弱,就不再产生男性根,而只产生女性根。这样一来,由于女性根是依靠与他人妻子私通等业为近缘而生起的,所以说它是由那个业所生。巴利
670. Indriye vinaṭṭhe ekanteneva liṅgampi vinassatevāti āha ‘‘itthiliṅgaṃ vinassatī’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo – imesu dvīsu purisindriyaṃ uttamaṃ, itthindriyaṃ hīnaṃ, purisindriyassa antaradhānaṃ mahantena akusalena kammena hoti, samuṭṭhānaṃ mahantena kusalakammena, itthindriyassa antaradhānaṃ dubbalākusalena, samuṭṭhānampi dubbalakusalena, duggatiyaṃ pana ubhayassāpi antaradhānaṃ, samuṭṭhānañca akusaleneva hotīti. Yadi sugatiyaṃ itthindriyampi kusaleneva nibbattati, kathañcarahi ‘‘paradārikakammaṃ katvā niraye paccitvā teneva pāpakammena pañcasatakkhattuṃ manussaloke itthī hutvā nibbattatī’’tiādivacananti? Nāyaṃ virodho nissandaphalavasena vuttattā. Tathā hi paṭisandhiyaṃ tāva purisindriyanibbattanārahampi kammaṃ kadāci paradārikādinā balavapāpakammena paṭibāhitasāmatthiyaṃ assa, tadā attano purisindriyanibbattane asamatthatāya itthindriyameva nibbatteti. Pavattiyaṃ pana attano balavabhāvena itthindriyūpanissayaṃ paradārikamakusalakammaṃ paṭibāhitvā paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya purisindriyaṃ samuṭṭhāpentaṃ kadāci laddhasāmaggitāsañjātabalavisesena paradārikādinā kammena paṭibāhitasāmatthiyaṃ bhaveyya, tadā attano dubbalatāya purisindriyaṃ na nibbatteti , itthindriyameva nibbatteti. Evaṃ paradārikādikammūpanissayena itthindriyassa nibbattanato taṃ tena nibbattitaṃ katvā vuccati.
671-2 当那个业因为重新具足条件,或者因为恶业已经耗尽而变得强有力时,它就会像被咒术附着的树在咒术解除后恢复本来样子那样,依自身的力量产生出男性根;而女性根因为缺少自己的因缘,就不会生起。即使两种根都生起,由于生起的是不同类的根,从前面第十七心识刹那住立的那一刻起,各自能产生根的业就不再产生各自对应的根。与第十七心识刹那一起生起的根,因为生起了不同类的根,就随着前一个心识一起灭去。如果它在第十七心识刹那生起之后还能继续生起,那么另一种根就不会生起,因为在同一个相续里,不允许两个根同时存在。正因为如此,在“若某人的男性根生起,他的女性根也会生起吗?”这个问题中,回答是“不会”。这样说明之后,论师将会说“双性人也是如此”等等。而且,当其中一个根灭去后,与它相关联的性征等会在几天之内灭去;它们灭去后,另一种根及其性征就依次生起——诸位师长是这样说的。由于既有能产生女性相的业,也有能产生男性相的业,所以从两方面来说他具有两种性征,因此称为“双性人”。所谓“对于他也是如此”,意思是说:即使对于具有两种性征的人,也应该只有一种根,那更何况是其他人呢?巴利
671-2. Yadā pana taṃ kammaṃ puna sāmaggipaṭilābhato, parikkhīṇapāpakammatāya vā balavappattaṃ abhavissa, tadā dinnavedhaṃ viya rukkhaṃ tadapagame attano balānurūpaṃ purisindriyaṃ nibbatteti, itthindriyaṃ pana attano kāraṇābhāvato nuppajjati. Ubhayassa pana nibbattiyampi visadisindriyanibbattanato pure sattarasamacittassa ṭhitikālamupādāya taṃtaṃsamuṭṭhāpakakammaṃ taṃ taṃ indriyaṃ na janeti. Sattarasamacittena saha uppannaṃ visadisindriyuppattito purimacittena saha nirujjhati. Yadi hi sattarasamacittuppādato parampi uppajjeyya, itaraṃ nuppajjati ekasmiṃ santāne dvinnaṃ sahuppattiyā anicchitattā. Teneva hi ‘‘yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) imasmiṃ pañhe ‘‘no’’ti (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) paṭikkhepo katoti. Evañca katvā vakkhati ‘‘ubhatobyañjanassāpī’’tiādi . Ekasmiñca niruddhe tappaṭibaddhāni liṅgādīni katipayadivasehi nirujjhanti, tesu niruddhesu itarāni anukkamena jāyantīti ācariyā. Itthinimittuppādakakammato, purisanimittuppādakakammato vāti ubhato duvidhaṃ byañjanamassāti ubhatobyañjano. Tassāpīti yassa duvidhaṃ byañjanamatthi, tassāpi ekameva indriyaṃ siyā, kiṃ pana itarassāti dasseti.
难道有了两种性征,就应该有两种根吗?因为性征是依各自的根而生起的。确实如此,它是生起的,但在这里,女性双性人依于女性根,终其一生只现起女性相;男性双性人依于男性根,只现起男性相;而另一种性征并不是以他的女性根或男性根为因而生起的。为了说明它到底由什么原因而有,便以“若如是”作追问,再用“无”等来作简别。若如是,就是只有一种根存在时。无,是说由于所依之因不存在,所以男性双性人没有女性性征,女性双性人没有男性性征,这就是其含义。非无,即并非没有第二种性征。非彼性征之因,即那个根不是第二种性征的因。为什么?因为第二种性征并非始终存在。当女性双性人对男人生起贪染心时,男性性征便显露,女性性征则隐没不现;男性双性人也是如此,对女人生起贪染心时,女性性征便显露,男性性征则隐没不现。如果他们的根是第二种性征的因,那么两种性征就应始终存在,但事实并非如此,因此应知“那个根不是那种性征的因”。那么什么才是因呢?回答说“彼……因”。其中,业伴,即前世所成就的、能生起根的业的助伴。贪染心,即女人对男人,或男人对女人所生起的淫欲贪染心。当此心生起时,那种性征便显露;当此心止息时,那种性征便隐没。然而,因为此人只有一种根,所以女性双性人自己也能为自己受胎,也能令他人为自己受胎。他因具有女性根而自己受胎,因对他人采取行动而使他人受胎。男性双性人因对他人采取行动而使他人受胎,但自己因具有男性根而不受胎。巴利
Nanu ca duvidhe byañjane sati indriyadvayenāpi bhavitabbaṃ, byañjanañhi taṃ taṃ indriyaṃ paṭicca jāyatīti? Saccaṃ jāyati, etthāpi itthiubhatobyañjanassa itthindriyaṃ paṭicca itthinimittameva yāvajīvaṃ pavattati, purisaubhatobyañjanassa purisindriyaṃ paṭicca purisanimittameva, itaraṃ pana na tassa itthindriyapurisindriyahetuto jāyati. Taṃ pana yena kāraṇena hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ sante’’ti anuyogaṃ katvā ‘‘na cābhāvo’’tiādinā sodhanaṃ tu vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santeti ekasmiṃyeva indriye sati. Abhāvo cāti yaṃ paṭicca jāyati, tassa abhāvato purisaubhatobyañjanassa itthibyañjanābhāvo, itthiubhatobyañjanassa purisabyañjanābhāvoti attho . Na cābhāvo siyāti neva dutiyabyañjanassa abhāvo siyā. Na taṃ byañjanakāraṇanti taṃ indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ na hoti. Kasmā? Sadā abhāvato. Itthiubhatobyañjanassa hi yadā itthiyā rāgacittaṃ uppajjati, tadā purisabyañjanaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthibyañjanaṃ paṭicchannaṃ guḷhaṃ hoti, tathā itarassa itaraṃ. Yadi ca tesaṃ indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, sadāpi byañjanadvayaṃ tiṭṭheyya, na pana tiṭṭhati, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘na tassa taṃ byañjanakāraṇa’’nti. Kiñcarahi kāraṇanti ce? Āha ‘‘tassā…pe… kāraṇa’’nti. Tattha kammasahāyanti purimabhavasiddhassa indriyanibbattakakammassa sahāyaṃ. Rāgacittanti itthiyā purisasmiṃ, purisassa itthiyaṃ vā uppannaṃ methunarāgacittaṃ. Tasmiñhi uppanne taṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ paṭippassaddhe paṭicchannaṃ hoti. Yasmā panimassa ekameva indriyaṃ hoti, tasmā itthiubhatobyañjanako sayampi paraṃ uddissa gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, attānaṃ uddissa parampi gaṇhāpeti. So hi itthindriyavantatāya sayaṃ gaṇhāti, paresu upakkamakaraṇato paraṃ gaṇhāpeti. Purisaubhatobyañjanako paresu upakkamakaraṇato paraṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpeti, sayaṃ pana purisindriyavantatāya gabbhaṃ na gaṇhāti.
因为有女性根,才会有女性特征等;当这些特征存在时,才会显现为女人。所以,这个根就是使它显现的原因,因此说它以显现女人为作用。而且,这两种根就像身净色一样,遍满整个身体,但它不会和身净色混在一起,因为特相不同、所依也不同。巴利
Yasmā itthindriye sati itthiliṅgādayo honti, tesu ca santesu itthīti pakāso hoti, tasmā taṃ tassa pakāsanakāraṇanti āha ‘‘itthīti pakāsanarasa’’nti. Duvidhampi panetaṃ indriyaṃ kāyapasādo viya sakalasarīrabyāpakameva, na cassa kāyapasādena saṅkaro lakkhaṇabhedato, nissayabhedato ca.
673 以维护俱生色为特相:就像与自身一同生起的色法在三刹那中现起,命根也是以这样的方式维护它们,这就是它的特相。因为命根纯粹是业所生,所以仅凭“俱生”这一表述,那些应当被维护的色法也就成立为业生性,因此没有再提“业生”。虽然业生色法各自只住立三刹那,但命根正是以作为它们现起之因的方式维护它们。因此说“以令它们现起为作用”。这里的“现起”,按前面所说的方式,就是令它们延续、维持、成为住立之因。因为业生色法不可能像食生等色法以食等为住立之因那样,单凭业就成为住立之因。为什么呢?因为业在那一刹那已不存在。业已灭去,却成为色的缘;因此,那些由业等起的色就像父母已死的孩子,要依靠叔父等其他依止才能现起;而除了命根,没有别的法能令它们延续,所以只有命根以令它们现起为作用。然而,食生等色法就像父母还活着的孩子,不依赖其他,只依各自的缘而现起。因为食等在自己存在的刹那,令色法等起之后,就安住下来维持它们的住立与现起;因此,那些由食等生起的色不依赖命根。其余诸色也各自依自己的缘而住立,所以并不期待别的令住立之因。而这命根,从业等起之色生起时起,就是它们的维护者。应当被延续、应当被令现起的俱生大种是它的近因,因此称为“以应延续之大种为近因”。巴利
673.Sahajarūpaparipālanalakkhaṇanti yathā attanā sahajātarūpāni tīsu khaṇesu pavattanti, evaṃ anupālanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jīvitindriyassa ekantakammajattā sahajaggahaṇeneva anupāletabbānampi kammajabhāvova siddhoti kammajaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Yathāsakaṃ khaṇattayamattaṭṭhāyīnampi kammajarūpānaṃ pavattihetubhāveneva taṃ anupālakaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ pavattanarasa’’nti. Pavattanañcettha vuttanayena tesaṃ yāpanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ ṭhitihetukatā. Na hi kammajānaṃ kammameva ṭhitihetu bhavituṃ sakkoti āhārajādīnaṃ āhārādi viya. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Taṅkhaṇābhāvato. Kammañhi niruddhaṃ rūpassa paccayo hoti, tato taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpāni matapitikā viya puttā cūḷapituādinissayena aññanissayeneva pavattanti, aññañca tesaṃ yāpanasamatthaṃ natthi aññatra jīvitindriyenāti tadeva tesaṃ pavattanarasaṃ. Āhārajādayo pana dharamānakapitikā viya puttā aññanirapekkhā sakasakapaccayavaseneva pavattanti. Āhārādayo hi attano atthikkhaṇeyeva rūpāni samuṭṭhāpetvā tesaṃ ṭhitipavattiyāva tiṭṭhanti, tato taṃsamuṭṭhānāni jīvitindriyanirapekkhāni. Sesānipi taṃtaṃpaccayavaseneva tiṭṭhantīti na aññaṃ ṭhapanakāraṇaṃ paccāsīsanti. Kammasamuṭṭhānampi cetaṃ uppādato paṭṭhāyeva anupālakaṃ. Yāpetabbāni pavattetabbāni sahajātabhūtāni padaṭṭhānametassāti yāpetabbabhūtapadaṭṭhānaṃ.
674 意识界:除去无色界异熟意识界,剩下的就是意识界。因此说“在五蕴有中”。在五蕴有中,意界和意识界依哪种色而转起,那种色就称为“所依”,这是文句的关联。而“在五蕴有中”这个限定,是就意识界说的,因为意界在四蕴有中根本不存在。虽然在巴利圣典中未载,但未来心所依处的存在,应当通过教证和理证来了知。其中,教证如下——巴利
674.Manoviññāṇadhātūti ṭhapetvā arūpāvacaravipākamanoviññāṇadhātuṃ avasesā manoviññāṇadhātu. Tenāha ‘‘pañcavokāre’’ti. Pañcavokāre manodhātu, manoviññāṇadhātuyo ca yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāya pavattanti, taṃ ‘‘vatthū’’ti pavuccatīti sambandho. Pañcavokāreti ca visesanaṃ manoviññāṇadhātuvasena kataṃ, manodhātu pana catuvokārabhave nattheva. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgatassāpi hadayavatthuno āgamato, yuttito ca atthibhāvo viññātabbo. Tattha āgamo tāva –
意界和意识界依靠哪种色法才能生起运作,那种色法就通过依止缘,成为意界、意识界以及和它们相应诸法的缘。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca pavattanti, taṃ rūpaṃ manodhātuyā ca manoviññāṇadhātuyā ca taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ nissayapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.8) –
以上就是《发趣论》的说法。不过,它的道理应当这样理解:在五蕴有中,意界和意识界这两界以完成所造色为依托,因为它们只依托色法而生起。凡是依托色法而生起的,都可以看出它是以完成所造色为依托的,就像眼识界一样。在这里,首先,色处等以及食素不能作为这两界的依托,因为可以看到它们在根之外也能生起;其次,女根和男根也不能作为依托,因为在没有这两者的无根相续中,也能看到这两界。命根则有与它同时生起的守护作用,所以也不能作为依托。因为命根专注于其他作用,不能成为这两界的依托。因此,通过排除法可以知道,这两界的依托就是所谓的“心所依处”。暂且不论作为这两界依托的所依处和所造色,应当知道这个心所依处是业所生、有固定作用、住在心脏部位的一种色法。怎么知道呢?因为它是识的所依色,所以是业所生,就像眼净色一样。凡是作为识之所依的色,都是业所生,正如眼净色。因此,它也有固定的作用。当一个人专注地作意、全心投入地思考某件事时,心脏部位会感到疲累,由此可知它住在那里。正如诸师所说:巴利
Evamādi paṭṭhānavacanaṃ. Yutti pana evaṃ veditabbā – nipphannaupādāyarūpanissayaṃ dhātudvayaṃ pañcavokārabhave rūpapaṭibaddhavuttittā. Yaṃ yañhi rūpapaṭibaddhavutti, taṃ taṃ nipphannaupādāyarūpanissayaṃ dissati yathā cakkhuviññāṇadhātu. Tattha na tāva rūpāyatanādīnaṃ, ojāya ca tannissayatā yujjati indriyapaṭibaddhato bahipi tesaṃ pavattidassanato, nāpi itthindriyapurisindriyānaṃ tadubhayavirahite abhāvakasantānepi dhātudvayadassanato. Jīvitindriyassāpi sahajaparipālanalakkhaṇakiccantaraṃ vijjatīti na tannissayatā yujjati. Tañhi kiccantare pasutaṃ na imāsaṃ nissayo bhavituṃ sakkoti, tasmā pārisesato tesaṃ nissayo hadayavatthu nāma atthīti viññātabbaṃ. Hotu tāva dhātudvayanissayo vatthu, upādāyarūpañca, taṃ panetaṃ kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ paṭiniyatakiccaṃ hadayappadese ṭhitamekanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathametaṃ viññāyatīti? Vuccate – vatthurūpabhāvato kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ cakkhu viya. Yañhi viññāṇassa vatthubhūtaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ yathā cakkhupasādo, tato eva paṭiniyatakiccaṃ aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbaṃ cetasā samannāharitvā kiñci cintentassa hadayappadesassa khijjanato tatthedaṃ tiṭṭhatīti viññāyati. Yathāhu ācariyā –
眼净色是业所生的,因为是所依处,就像眼有固定的作用一样。
通过思惟和胸部疲惫,应知它们住立在彼处。巴利
‘‘Kammajaṃ vatthubhāvā taṃ, cakkhuṃva niyatakriyaṃ; Cintāya ca urokhedā, tatra tiṭṭhanti vijāniya’’nti.
如果作为意界和意识界的依止而存在的心所依处确实有,那为什么在色蕴的部分里没有说到它呢?难道对确实存在的东西不说,是有理由的吗?不是没有理由,而是因为另有别的理由。那是什么理由呢?是教法阐述方式的不同。就像眼识等完全以眼等为依止,意识却不是完全以心所依处为依止——只有在五蕴有中它才依止于那里——而且关于依处的教说,是纯粹按照“依止”这个角度来展开的。比如“有色法是眼识的依处,有色法不是眼识的依处”等等,这是用眼识等所依止的法来加以区分。而对于完全以心所依处为依止的意识,如果按照那个角度在双论等中说到“有色法是意识的依处”等等,那么与之相应的所缘双论等就无法成立。因为不能说“有色法是意识的所缘,有色法不是意识的所缘”,这样一来,依处双论和所缘双论就会类别不同,教法就不会是一味的了。而世尊的意趣正是要宣说一味的教法,所以在那里没有说心所依处,并不是因为它不存在。这确实是世尊的一贯做法:为了宣说一味的教法,即使某些法确实存在,也不去取用它。同样地,在“施设品”中,因为按照心生的分别没有说到,所以在解释“无寻无伺句”时就不能说“寻和伺”;在解释“无寻唯伺句”时,虽然寻确实存在,也没有把它举出来,否则就应该说“有寻”了。由于它是依止的性质,所以呈现为好像被举起来扛在肩上一样,这就是“举起”的现起。巴利
Yadi manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayabhūtaṃ hadayavatthu nāma atthi, kasmā panetaṃ rūpakaṇḍe na vuttaṃ. Na hi labbhamānassa avacane kāraṇaṃ atthīti? No natthi kāraṇantarasambhavato. Kiṃ pana taṃ kāraṇaṃ? Desanābhedo. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇādīni ekantato cakkhādinissayāni, na evaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ekantena hadayavatthunissitaṃ pañcavokārabhaveyeva tannissayattā, ekantena nissitavaseneva ca vatthudesanā pavattā. ‘‘Atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu, atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa na vatthū’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 584) cakkhuviññāṇādīhi nissitehi visesitattā. Yampi ekantena hadayavatthunissayaṃ tassa vasena ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā dukādīsu vuccamānesu na tadanuguṇā ārammaṇadukādayo sambhavanti. Na hi ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, atthi rūpaṃ na manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇa’’nti sakkā vattunti vatthārammaṇadukā bhinnagatikā siyuṃ, na ekarasā desanā bhaveyya, ekarasañca desanaṃ desetuṃ tattha bhagavato ajjhāsayo, tasmā tattha hadayavatthu na vuttaṃ, na alabbhamānattā. Esā hi bhagavato pakati, yaṃ ekaraseneva desanaṃ desetuṃ labbhamānassāpi kassaci aggahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi nikkhepakaṇḍepi cittuppādavibhāgena avuccamānattā avitakkāvicārapadavisajjane vitakko vicāro cāti vattuṃ na sakkāti avitakkavicāramattapadavisajjane labbhamānopi vitakko na uddhaṭo, aññathā ‘‘vitakko cā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti. Nissayabhāvato upari āropetvā vahantaṃ viya paccupaṭṭhātīti ubbāhanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
675 在四种食当中,这里因为以色法为主,所以应当取段食,因此说“食性就是段食”。其中,捏成团状,所以叫“段”;被摄取,所以叫“食”,意思是捏成团之后吞下去。这是为了显示食有实际依托物才这么说。不过,段食里的食素在这里才被称为“食”,所以说“以此食素”等等。这种食素具有摄取色法的性质,能起支持、给予力量的作用,随行于身体各肢节,是摄取色法者,依靠诸界,是一种独特的东西。内在的食要获得外在食物作为缘之后,才使色法生起,因此,这种内在的食也以亲依止缘的方式摄取色法,所以说“摄取以食素为第八的色法”。所谓“以食素为第八”,就是以食素作为第八项。“以此食素”:指从自身生起的刹那之后就能生起色法,所以称为食素,也就是存在于饭、粥等食物中的那种遍满食素。“于处处”:就是在各个国土、城市等地方。被称为“段食”,是因为以它为事物基础,这是这里的意旨。巴利
675. Catūsu āhāresu idha rūpādhikārato kabaḷīkāro āhāro gahetabboti āha ‘‘āhāratāti kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’ti. Tattha kabaḷaṃ karīyatīti kabaḷīkāro. Āharīyatīti āhāro, kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharīyatīti attho. Idañca savatthukaṃ katvā āhāraṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Kabaḷīkārāhārassa pana ojā idha āhāro nāma. Tenāha ‘‘yāya ojāyā’’tiādi. So ca rūpāharaṇasabhāvo upatthambhanabalakaro aṅgamaṅgānusārīrasāharaṇabhūto bhūtanissito eko viseso. Bāhirāhārapaccayaṃ paṭilabhitvā eva ajjhattikāhāro rūpaṃ uppādetīti ayaṃ ajjhattikāhārassa upanissayabhāvenāpi rūpaṃ āharatīti āha ‘‘ojaṭṭhamakaṃ rūpaṃ āharatī’’ti. Ojā aṭṭhamī yassa taṃ ojaṭṭhamakaṃ. Yāya ojāyāti attano udayānantaraṃ rūpajananato ojāsaṅkhātāya odanakummāsādivatthugatāya yāya pharaṇaojāya. Yattha yatthāti yamhi yamhi janapade, nagarādīsu ca. ‘‘Kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’ti pavuccati tabbatthukattāti adhippāyo.
676 那么,所依(食物)的作用是什么?食素的作用又是什么?为了说明“所依的作用是消除危害,食素的作用是护持”,所以说“饭食等”等等。“取火”是指执取业生的火。当腹腔里没有饭食等食物时,业生的火就生起来,执取称为胃膜的执受色,让人说出“我饿了,给我食物”。进食的时候,它就放开胃膜,转而执取非执受的食物,这时众生就安定了。就像影鬼看见有人走进影子里,就抓住他,用天链捆住,在自己的住处享乐;当它饿了的时候,就回来咬那人的头,那人被咬就喊叫起来,其他人听到喊叫声也过来了,影鬼就把来的人一个个抓住吃掉,在自己的住处享乐。同样地,业生的火执取各种饭食等食物,消化掉之后,又再执取胃膜。因此,饭食等食物进入自己的胃膜而安住时,它就使执取着执受身的火放开胃膜,再令火执取食物自身,从而把火带到自己身边。“唯独”是指:不含食素的食物不能护持业生的命根。巴利
676. Kiṃ pana vatthuno kiccaṃ, kiṃ ojāyāti ce? Parissayaharaṇaṃ vatthussa kiccaṃ, pālanaṃ ojāyāti dassento āha ‘‘annapānādika’’ntiādi. Aggiṃ harati kammajanti kammajatejaṃ gaṇhāti. Antokucchiyañhi odanādivatthusmiṃ asati kammajatejo uṭṭhahitvā udarapaṭalasaṅkhātamupādinnarūpaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘chātomhi, āhāraṃ me dethā’’ti vadāpeti, bhuttakāle udarapaṭalaṃ muñcitvā anupādinnakavatthuṃ gaṇhāti, atha satto ekaggo hoti. Yathā hi chāyārakkhaso chāyāpaviṭṭhaṃ disvā gahetvā devasaṅkhalikāya bandhitvā attano bhavane modanto chātakāle āgantvā sīse daṃsati, so daṭṭhattā viravati, taṃ viravaṃ sutvā sace aññepi manussā āgacchanti, so āgatāgate gahetvā khāditvā sakabhavane modati , evaṃ yaṃ yaṃ annapānādikaṃ vatthu, taṃ taṃ kammajatejo gahetvā jīrāpetvā puna udarapaṭalaṃ gaṇhāti, tasmā annapānādikaṃ vatthu attano udarapaṭalaṃ paviṭṭhakāle upādinnakāyaṃ gahetvā ṭhitaṃ tato mocetvā attānaṃ gaṇhāpanavasena taṃ attano santikaṃ harati. Kevalanti ojāviyuttaṃ vatthu jīvitaṃ kammajabhūtaṃ taṃ pāletuṃ na sakkoti.
677 食素……“消化”:食素能够维持生命,却不能承载业生之火,因为胃里还不满,这就是它的意思。以“支撑”为现起:它是通过摄取食素所生色法来支撑这个身体的方式而现起的。以身:就是以色身。自己的状态:就是自己的意图。令了知:就是令他人了知。随取身:对于正在颤动的身体所呈现的色法,在眼门速行之后生起的、称为决断执取的意门速行,通过随念这些速行,它们就是那些眼门速行的无间,这就是意思。因为在五门中,当色等所缘呈现时,依缘生起善或不善的速行之后,落入有分;接着意门速行以同一所缘为对象,落入有分;再次在同一门中确定所缘之后,速行落入有分。因此,在眼门速行之后生起的两个速行回合之后,以第三回合生起的意门速行路为所取,以它作为工具,在第四回合的意门速行中,状态就被了知了。由此说明了表这个词的工具格用法。而通过“自己……”等,则说明了它的业格用法。巴利
677.Ojā…pe… pācakanti ojā jīvitaṃ pāletuṃ sakkoti, kammajaṃ tejaṃ harituṃ na sakkoti āmāsayassa apuṇṇatoti adhippāyo. Upatthambhanapaccupaṭṭhānoti ojaṭṭhamakarūpaharaṇavaseneva imassa kāyassa upatthambhanavasena paccupaṭṭhāti. Kāyenāti rūpakāyena. Attano bhāvanti attano adhippāyaṃ. Viññāpentānanti paresaṃ saññāpentānaṃ. Kāyaggahaṇānusārenāti phandamānakāyagatavaṇṇassa gahaṇabhūtānaṃ cakkhudvārikajavanānantarappavattānaṃ nicchayaggahaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ manodvārikajavanānaṃ anussaraṇena tesaṃ anantaranti attho. Pañcadvāre hi rūpādiārammaṇe āpāthagate yathāpaccayaṃ kusalākusalajavane uppajjitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇe manodvārikajavanaṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ katvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, puna tasmiṃyeva dvāre visayaṃ vavatthāpetvā javanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, tasmā cakkhudvārikajavanānantarappavattānaṃ dvinnaṃ javanavārānamanantaraṃ tatiyavāre pavattāya manodvārajavanavīthiyā eva gahitāya etāya karaṇabhūtāya catutthavāre manodvāre javaneneva bhāvo viññāyati. Etena viññatti-saddassa karaṇasādhanatā vuttā. Sayaṃ vātiādinā pana kammasādhanattamāha.
这样展示了“表”这个词在两种格(工具格和业格)中都能成立之后,现在为了说明它与“身”这个词组成的持业释复合词,并说明“身”这个说法在表上的运用,就引述了“以身防护”等经文。因为通过身体的动作而成为让人知道意图的原因,也就是说,以正在动作的身体作为工具,成为让人知道意图的原因,所以“以身表”也叫“身表”,这是它们之间的关联。不过这里的含义是:由于表是身体动作的原因,所以拿那个以表为因的、被称为身体动作的“身”来让人知道意图;因此,表被当作让人知道意图的原因,所以说“以身让人知道意图”。同样地,拿了身体动作之后,因为表在这里被当作“这就是它的因”,而且表本身也通过身被了知,所以“以身表”也叫“身表”。巴利
Evaṃ viññatti-saddassa kārakadvaye sambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni kāya-saddena saha kammadhārayasamāsaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘kāyo’’ti vohārassa viññattiyampi ca pavattiṃ dassento ‘‘kāyenasaṃvaro’’tiādisuttamāha. Kāyavipphandanena adhippāyaviññāpanahetuttāti vipphandamānakāyena karaṇabhūtena adhippāyaviññāpanahetubhāvato kāyena viññattītipi kāyaviññattīti sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha attho – viññattiyā kāyavipphandanassa hetubhāvato taṃhetukaṃ kāyavipphandanasaṅkhātaṃ kāyaṃ gahetvā adhippāyajānanato viññatti adhippāyaviññāpanassa kāraṇabhāvena gayhatīti kāyena adhippāyaṃ viññāpetīti. Tathā kāyavipphandanaṃ gahetvā tassa kāraṇamettha atthīti viññattiyā gayhamānattā sayañca kāyena viññāyati, tasmā kāyena viññattītipi kāyaviññattīti.
678 “心生风界”是指:由心等起、能引发前进等动作的风界。“形态变化”是指:以形态的方式呈现的变化。那么,这种形态变化是谁的呢?从能力上说,它属于风界增胜的心生四大种。那种能力是什么?就是作为运动之因、属于心生、以及属于所造色。或者也可以说:有一种形态变化从属于“心生风界”。因为属格不仅着眼于与运动的关系,也着眼于与形态变化的关系。巴利
678.Cittajāniladhātuyāti abhikkamādipavattakacittasamuṭṭhānavāyodhātuyā. Ākāravikāratāti ākārabhūto vikāro. Kassa pana sā ākāravikāratāti? Sāmatthiyato vāyodhātuadhikānaṃ cittajamahābhūtānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ sāmatthiyaṃ? Calanahetutā, cittajatā, upādāyarūpatā ca. Atha vā cittajāniladhātuyā ekā ākāravikāratāti sambandho. Na kevalañhi sāmivacanaṃ calanasambandhāpekkhāya eva, atha kho ākāravikārasambandhāpekkhāyapīti.
如果这样的话,表色怎么是所造色呢?因为经文中说“心生风界”,这句话似乎表示形态变化只是风界的作用,可是按照“四大种所造色”的说法,并不存在只依靠单独一种大种的所造色。这并没有错,因为四种大种的变化可以存在于其中任何一种之中,就像四人共有的财产一样。或者,这里把风界增胜的色聚称为“风界”,因为其中风界增胜,所以这样称呼,就像在构成要素中,因为地界增胜而称为地界一样。因此,风界增胜的心生四大种的一种形态变化,就是身表,这没有任何矛盾。而且,这种增胜应该从能力上来看,而不是从数量上来看。否则,它们不可分离地生起的特性就说不通了。因为增胜是指依其自身增胜之力而与其他大种分离地生起。能力上的增胜则来自因缘的随顺。因为,因就是引发前进等动作的心,这个心以造作运动的思为其本性,在由它等起的色聚中,随顺于它的风界自然具有增胜性。然而,有些人执取“形态变化只属于风界”,按照他们的观点,所造色性就很难成立。因为不能说一种大种的变化就是四大的所造色。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ viññattiyā upādāyarūpattaṃ. ‘‘Cittajāniladhātuyā’’ti hi vacanena vāyodhātuyāva ākāravikāratā viññatti āpajjati, na ca ekabhūtanissitaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ nāma atthi ‘‘catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti (dha. sa. 584) vacanatoti? Nāyaṃ doso, catunnaṃ vikāratā catūsu ekassapi hoti catusādhāraṇadhanaṃ viya. Aniladhātuadhikakalāpo vā idha ‘‘aniladhātū’’ti vuccati, tadadhike taṃvohārato yathā sambhāradhātuyā adhikabhāvena pathavīvohāro, tasmā vāyodhātuadhikānaṃ cittajamahābhūtānaṃ ekā ākāravikāratā kāyaviññattīti na koci virodho. Adhikatā cassā sāmatthiyato daṭṭhabbā, na pamāṇato. Itarathā hi tesaṃ avinibbhogavuttitā na yujjeyya. Adhikatā hi attano adhikavasena itarehi vinibbhogappavattito hoti. Sāmatthiyādhikañca kāraṇānukāritāya. Kāraṇañhi abhikkamādipavattakaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ calanādhippāyasabhāvaṃ tato samuṭṭhite kalāpe anukaronte vāyodhātuyā eva adhikattaṃ yuttanti. Keci pana ‘‘vāyodhātuyā eva ākāravikāratā’’ti gaṇhanti, tesaṃ matena upādārūpattaṃ durūpapannaṃ. Na hi ekassa vikāro catunnaṃ upādārūpanti sakkā vattuṃ.
这种变化到底是怎样的?回答说:是俱生色法运动的因。其中,俱生是指与自己同时生起的。因为时节生、心生、食生之色的运动,只有依靠与心生色的关联才能发生,就像投进河里的干牛粪团等,是依靠河水的流动而移动一样。但就表色而言,只有心生色的运动,所以才说俱生。色是指色身。运动是指处于僵直、维持、移动等称为运动的状态。因为僵直等也由于朝向运动而可以称为运动。因是指作为因、作为助缘。说到这里,究竟说了什么呢?所谓身表,既不是正在颤动的色身,也不是正在颤动的风界,而是像举起大石头时,用尽全力抓取的那一刻,身体所生起的奋发变化那样,是作为色身颤动的缘而得到的一种形态变化,这就称为身表。巴利
Kīdisī panāyaṃ vikāratāti āha ‘‘sahajātassa rūpassa calane hetū’’ti. Tattha sahajātassāti attanā sahajātassa. Yasmā utucittāhārajānaṃ calanaṃ cittajarūpasambandheneva hoti, nadīsotacalanena tattha pakkhittasukkhagomayapiṇḍādīnaṃ viya. Viññattivasena pana cittajānameva calanaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sahajātassā’’ti. Rūpassāti rūpakāyassa. Calaneti santhambhanasandhāraṇacalanasaṅkhāte calitabhāve. Santhambhanādikampi hi calanābhimukhatāya calananti yujjati. Hetūti hetubhūtā sahakārīkāraṇabhūtā. Ettāvatā ca kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Kāyaviññatti nāma neva phandamānarūpakāyo, na ca phandamānā vāyodhātu, atha kho mahantaṃ pāsāṇaṃ ukkhipantassa sabbathāmena gahaṇakāle sarīrassa ussāhanavikāro viya rūpakāyassa paripphandanapaccayabhāvena labbhamāno eko ākāravikāro kāyaviññatti nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
难道在摇动的颜色等之外,就没有某种变化存在,而对它的执取是在执取颜色之后紧接着发生的吗?这一点怎么知道呢?通过执取意图而知道。因为在没有表达变化的事物中,比如树在摇动等,看不到对意图的执取;但在手在摇动等当中,却能看到。因此,必须完全接受:在摇动的颜色等之外,确实有某种变化存在,它是意图的表达者。而且,能使人知道的原因,只有在它自身被执取之后,才能使人知道它所要去表达的意义,并不是仅仅因为它存在就能使人知道。在执取了应当知道的颜色之后,对变化的执取也是通过推论而成立的。正如他们这样说:巴利
Nanu ca phandamānavaṇṇādivinimutto koci vikāro atthi, tassa vaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ gahaṇaṃ hotīti kathametaṃ viññāyatīti? Adhippāyaggahaṇato. Na hi viññattivikārarahitesu rukkhacalanādīsu adhippāyaggahaṇaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, hatthacalanādīsu pana diṭṭhaṃ, tasmā phandamānavaṇṇādivinimutto koci vikāro atthi adhippāyassa viññāpakoti sampaṭicchitabbametaṃ ekantena. Ñāpako ca hetu sayaṃ gahitoyeva attano ñāpetabbamatthaṃ ñāpeti, na vijjamānamattenāti. Ñāpetabbavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ vikāraggahaṇampi anumānato siddhaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti –
未成为对境的,
声音并不能表达意义;
不是单凭存在就能于义
他们已了知,是宣说者。巴利
‘‘Visayattamanāpannā, Saddā nevatthabodhakā; Na sattāmattato atthe, Te aññātā pakāsakā’’ti.
如果仅仅把握到变化本身就是把握意图的原因,那为什么没有掌握约定的人,不会产生对意图的把握呢?其实,把握变化并不是把握意图的唯一原因,还应该知道:先前已经成立的关联的把握,也是它的亲依止缘。就像在树林里的水边,看到竖起来的牛头等指示水的标记之后,紧接着生起一段察觉不到间隔的意门速行心路,抓住了牛头等与水相伴的形态和相状,从而知道“这里有水”;同样地,把握了颤动的色相之后,紧接着生起一段察觉不到间隔的意门速行心路,以先前已把握的关联作为亲依止缘,就产生了对带有意图的变化的把握。巴利
Yadi vikāraggahaṇameva kāraṇamadhippāyaggahaṇassa, kasmā aggahitasaṅketānaṃ adhippāyaggahaṇaṃ na hotīti? Na kevalaṃ vikāraggahaṇameva adhippāyassa gahaṇassa kāraṇaṃ, atha kho purimasiddhasambandhaggahaṇañca imassa upanissayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi araññe udakatitthe ussāpetvā ṭhapitagosīsādīni udakanimittāni disvā tadanantarappavattāya aviññāyamānantarāya manodvārajavanavīthiyā gosīsādīnaṃ udakasahacārīpakārasaññāṇākāraṃ gahetvā ‘‘udakamettha atthī’’ti jānanaṃ, evaṃ phandamānavaṇṇaṃ gahetvā tadanantappavattāya aviññāyamānantarāya manodvāravīthiyā purimaggahitasambandhūpanissayasahitāya sādhippāyavikāraggahaṇaṃ hotīti.
681-2 681-2. 带有表识变异的风界作为俱生色移动之因,这是合理的。为了澄清“难道一切风界都能移动俱生色吗”这一责难,所以说了“然而得到支持之后”等话。“支持”就是支撑,意思是支撑缘。所谓“一个转向路”,是指意门速行路,因为五门路没有令表识生起的作用。“由下方六心”:在七个速行心中,得到由下方六个速行心所等起的风界作为支持,这样连接。不过有些人在版本中见到“风界所生”的文句,就把“支持”按状态名词用法来理解,解释为:得到由下方六心所生风界所等起的支持。由于带有表识性:即自身带有表识,以令与自身俱生的心生色在他处生起为因的方式使其移动,而不是其他风界,这是它的含义。巴利
681-2. Sahajarūpacalanassa viññattivikārasahitāya vāyodhātuyā hetubhāvo yutto, kiṃ sabbā eva vāyodhātu sahajarūpaṃ cāletīti imaṃ codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘labhitvā panupatthambha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Upatthambhetīti upatthambhaṃ, upatthambhakapaccayanti attho. Ekāvajjanavīthiyanti manodvārikajavanavīthiṃ sandhāyāha pañcadvārikavīthiyā viññattisamuṭṭhāpakattābhāvato. Heṭṭhāhi chahi ca cittehīti sattasu javanesu heṭṭhimehi chahi javanehi samuṭṭhitaṃ vāyodhātuṃ upatthambhaṃ labhitvāti sambandho. Keci pana potthakesu ‘‘vāyodhātusamuṭṭhita’’nti pāṭhaṃ disvā upatthambhanti bhāvasādhanavasena gahetvā heṭṭhā chahi cittehi uppannavāyodhātusamuṭṭhitaṃ upatthambhaṃ labhitvāti yojenti. Viññattisahitattanāti sayaṃ viññattisahitā attanā sahajātaṃ cittajarūpaṃ desantaruppattihetubhāvena calayati, na itarāti attho.
这里应当理解的意旨是:就像一辆需要七组牛来拉的车,只有第七组牛因为得到下面六组牛的支持,才能把车拉动;而第一组等前面的牛,只是起到稳住和支撑的作用,是那些牛的支持者。同样,由第七个速行生起的风界,因为得到下面六个速行所生风界的支持,所以能移动心生色。而由第一个速行等生起的风界,只是起到稳住和支撑的作用,是它的支持者。这里所说的移动,其实就是在他处生起,因为诸法从生起的地方连一个发尖那么一点都不会移动;否则,诸法的无作业性与刹那性就不能成立。那么,它怎么成为俱生色在他处生起的因呢?应当这样理解:就像与自身俱生的色,从下面速行等所生色所安住的地方,在他处生起;同样,与它们一起在那个新处生起,这就是它成为他处生起之因的方式。巴利
Ayaṃ panetthādhippāyo – yathā nāma sattahi yugehi ākaḍḍhitabbasakaṭe sattamayugayuttā eva goṇā heṭṭhā chasu yugesu yuttagoṇehi laddhupatthambhā sakaṭaṃ cālenti, paṭhamayugādiyuttā pana santhambhanasandhāraṇamattameva sādhentā tesaṃ upatthambhakā honti, evamevaṃ sattamajavanasamuṭṭhitā vāyodhātu heṭṭhā chahi javanehi samuṭṭhitavāyodhātuto laddhupatthambhā cittajarūpaṃ cāleti. Paṭhamajavanādisamuṭṭhitā pana santhambhanasandhāraṇamattaṃ sādhentā tassa upatthambhakā honti, desantaruppattiyeva cettha calanaṃ uppannadesato kesaggamattampi dhammānaṃ calanābhāvato, itarathā dhammānaṃ abyāpāratā, khaṇikatā ca na siyā. Kathaṃ panassa sahajarūpānaṃ desantaruppattiyā hetubhāvoti? Yathā attanā sahajarūpāni heṭṭhimajavanādisamuṭṭhitarūpehi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānato aññattha uppajjanti, evaṃ tehi saha tattha uppattiyevassa desantaruppattihetubhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
那么,在把握了颤动色相之后紧接着说到表识的把握,又因为特别限定为第七速行所生的风界伴有表识,难道只有伴有移动行相的风界才伴有变异吗?并非如此。因为即使不能以令他处生起之因的方式使其移动,仅仅通过完成稳固与持载,由第一速行等所生的风界也同样伴有表识变异。这是由于当想要朝某个方向前进等时,便会有朝向那个方向的变异产生。与意图俱起的变异,就被称为表识。正因如此,世尊说:什么是那种色,即身表?就是善心……乃至……无记心……或前进……乃至……或伸展时,身的稳固、持载、稳固性,即是表识、令知、令知性。这就是那种色,即身表。(《法集论》720)稳固与持载的缘相也被称为身表。这样说来,意门转向也具有令起表识的作用,这个说法就非常合理了。巴利
Atha phandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ viññattiggahaṇassa vuttattā viññattisahitāti sattamajavanasamuṭṭhitāya eva ca visesitattā calanākārasahitāyeva vāyodhātu vikārasahitāti? Nayidamevaṃ desantaruppattihetubhāvena calayitumasakkontiyopi santhambhanasandhāraṇamattakaraṇena paṭhamajavanādisamuṭṭhānavāyodhātuyopi viññattivikārasahitā eva. Yena disābhāgena gantvā abhikkamādīni pavattetukāmo tadabhimukhabhāvavikārasambhavato. Adhippāyasahabhāvinañhi vikāraṃ viññattimācikkhanti. Teneva hi bhagavatā ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ kāyaviññatti? Yā kusalacittassa vā…pe… abyākatacittassa vā abhikkamantassa vā…pe… pasārentassa vā kāyassa thambhanā santhambhanā santhambhitattaṃ viññatti viññāpanā viññāpitattaṃ. Idaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ kāyaviññattī’’ti (dha. sa. 720) santhambhanasandhāraṇānampi paccayabhāvākāro kāyaviññattīti vutto. Evañca katvā manodvārāvajjanassāpi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakatāvacanaṃ suṭṭhu upapannaṃ hoti.
683-4 由心生起的地界,在被执取的色法撞击时,所产生的那种形态变化,就是语表。这是它们之间的关联。其中,“由心生起”是指由发起言语表达的心所生起的。“被执取的色法撞击”是指:对被称为执取聚的、文字生起之处的、名为撞击的作用所进行的撞击,这就是它的含义。“缘”是指它作为辅助因。“一种形态变化”是指:从被撞击的执取色法以及能撞击的地界中区分出来的、以地界之执取撞击缘为本质的、一种特殊的形态变化,这就是它的含义。“地界”是属格用法,应当依照身表部分所说的“观待两者关联”等方式来理解。不过这里有一个差别:在那里,是在把握了颤动的色相之后紧接着被把握;而在这里,应当理解为是在听到所闻的声音之后紧接着被把握。而且,由于没有稳固等作用,声音是与撞击同时生起的,因此不能套用“然而获得支持之后”这类说法。因为撞击在第一速行等阶段也能存在。所以说“随声”。那么,撞击和移动有什么差别呢?撞击是由于特殊的缘,使诸大种聚彼此更靠近地生起;移动则是即使单独一个聚也在其他地方相续生起。这就是它们的差别。牛头等譬喻应当按各自对应的情况来配合。“有声”就是指那伴有声音的表识。“释迦族之月”是指以照亮极清净虚空之义,成为释迦王族之月轮者。或者:行使最胜主权者为indu;因indu一词有最胜之义,故为释迦族之最胜者。巴利
683-4. Cittajātāya pathavīdhātuyā upādinnakaghaṭṭane paccayo yo ākāravikāro, ayaṃ vacīviññatti viññeyyāti sambandho. Tattha cittajātāyāti vacībhedappavattakacittasamuṭṭhānāya . Upādinnakaghaṭṭaneti upādinnakakalāpasaṅkhātassa akkharuppattiṭṭhānassa ghaṭṭanasaññite kicce ghaṭṭanassāti attho. Paccayoti tassa sahakārīkāraṇabhūto. Eko ākāravikāroti ghaṭṭiyamānaupādinnarūpato, ghaṭṭanti yā pathavīdhātuto ca vinivaṭṭo pathavīdhātuyā upādinnaghaṭṭanapaccayasabhāvarūpo eko ākāravikāravisesoti attho. Pathavidhātuyāti sāmivacanaṃ ‘‘ubhayasambandhāpekkha’’ntiādi kāyaviññattiyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha phandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ gayhati, evamidha suyyamānasaddasavanānantaranti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idañca santhambhanādīnaṃ abhāvena ghaṭṭanena saddhiṃyeva saddassa uppajjanato ‘‘labhitvā panupatthambha’’ntiādinayo na labbhati. Ghaṭṭanañhi paṭhamajavanādīsupi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘saddavasā’’ti. Atha ghaṭṭanacalanānaṃ ko visesoti? Ghaṭṭanaṃ paccayavisesena bhūtakalāpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ āsannataruppādatā, calanaṃ ekassāpi desantaruppādanaparamparatāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Gosīsādiupamāpettha yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbā. Sāvāti sā eva sahasaddā viññatti. Sakyakulindunāti suparisuddhagaganatalassa sakkarājakulassa avabhāsakaṭṭhena tassa nisākarabhūtena. Atha vā indati paramissariyaṃ karotīti indu. Indu-saddassa uttamavācakattā sakkakuluttamenāti attho.
685 685. 那么,先说表色:表色固然伴随声音,但是否存在心生而非表色之声呢?为了说明“并非如此”,论师说“声音不是心所生起的”等等。“表色撞击”是指以表色为缘的地界撞击。用“正因为诸界撞击”等话,是在证成前面已经说过的义理。意思是:因为声音正是由诸界撞击才生起,离开这个就不会生起。通过这一点,论师驳斥了这样的主张:“‘寻的扩散之声不是耳识所能了知的’,因为《大注释》中这样说过,所以心等起的寻的扩散之声,即使没有表色也能生起。由于《法集论》636节说‘由那言语而有表、有令了知’,所以不是耳识所能了知的声音不会和表色一起生起,因此也存在心所生的声九法聚。”而《大注释》的说法也被那些认为“声音就是声音,说它不是耳识所能了知,这是自相矛盾”的结集者所驳斥。然而阿难陀阿阇梨并没有驳斥《大注释》的说法,而是解释了其中的意趣。怎样解释呢?他说:“经中‘以天耳听到由寻等起、与表色俱生的舌、腭等动作所产生的微细声音,然后告诉别人’;而在《发趣论》中,则是就粗显的声音而说它是耳识的所缘缘——就是依据这个意趣,才说寻的扩散之声不是耳识所能了知的。”巴利
685. Atha viññatti tāva sahasaddāva, saddo pana cittajo aviññattiko atthīti ce? Natthīti dassento āha ‘‘saddo na cittajo’’tiādi. Viññattighaṭṭananti viññattipaccayaṃ pathavīdhātuyā ghaṭṭanaṃ. Dhātusaṅghaṭṭanenevātiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ samattheti. Yasmā dhātusaṅghaṭṭaneneva saddo jāyati, na tena vinā, tasmāti attho. Anena ca ye vadanti ‘‘vitakkavipphārasaddo na sotaviññeyyoti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā cittasamuṭṭhāno vitakkavipphārasaddo viññattiyā vināpi uppajjati. ‘Yā tāya vācāya viññatti viññāpanā’ti (dha. sa. 636) hi vacanato asotaviññeyyena saddena saha viññatti na uppajjati, tatova cittajopi saddanavako atthī’’ti, tesaṃ vādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Mahāaṭṭhakathāvādopi hi saddova hoti, na sotaviññeyyoti viruddhametanti maññamānehi saṅgahakārehi paṭikkhittova. Ānandācariyo pana mahāaṭṭhakathāvādaṃ appaṭikkhipitvāva tattha adhippāyaṃ vaṇṇeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Jivhātālucalanādikaravitakkasamuṭṭhitaṃ viññattisahajameva sukhumasaddaṃ dibbasotena sutvā ādisatī’’ti sutte, paṭṭhāne ca oḷārikaṃ saddaṃ sandhāya sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo vuttoti iminā adhippāyena vitakkavipphārasaddassa asotaviññeyyatā vuttāti.
686-7 “令了知”是指:以语声为因,让人知道自己的意图。“自身可了知”是指:顺着执取,或者以语声为因,自身可以被了知。“它的”是指“表”这个词。“两种语法角色(因与业)”是指:能令了知的就是表,被了知的就是表——这样,在因或业的意义上,它的生起、产生,就是这个意思。那么,这两种表是心等起的,还是业等起的呢?所以说“不是两种表”等等。就像八种色法一样:意思是,就像各自色聚中的八种色法一样。因为两种表被放在一起说,而身表俱生的色聚里找不到声音,所以即使语表的色聚里有声音,也把它放下,只说“八种”。巴利
686-7.Viññāpanatoti vacīghosena adhippāyaviññāpanahetuttā. Sayaṃ viññeyyatoti gahaṇānusārena vacīghosena vā hetunā sayaṃ viññeyyattā. Tassāti viññattisaddassa. Sambhavo kārakadvayeti viññāpayatīti viññatti, viññāyatīti viññattīti evaṃ hetumhi, kammani vā tassa sambhavo nibbatti hotīti attho. Kiṃ panetaṃ viññattidvayaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, udāhu kammādisamuṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘na viññattidvaya’’ntiādi. Aṭṭha rūpāni viyāti sakasakakalāpagataaṭṭharūpāni viya, viññattidvayassa ekato vuccamānattā kāyaviññattisahajakalāpe saddo na labbhatīti vacīviññattikalāpe labbhamānampi taṃ hitvā ‘‘aṭṭha’’icceva vuttaṃ.
通过如前所说的变异的把握方式,“此人想要做此事”这样,具有该意愿者的意愿就被了知,因此说“以显示意愿为味”。由于作为身体动作之因的风界之变异,它就以身体动作之因这种形态呈现出来,因此说“以身体……为呈现”。因为风界的作用最为突出,所以说“其近因是心等起风界”。所谓“以语声的因性为呈现”,就是按照前面所说的方式,以称为语声的心生声音的因性为呈现。巴利
Yathāvuttavikāraggahaṇamukhena ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ nāma kātukāmo’’ti taṃsamaṅgino adhippāyo viññāyatīti āha ‘‘adhippāyappakāsanarasā’’ti. Kāyavipphandanahetubhūtāya vāyodhātuyā vikārattā tassā kāyavipphandanassa hetubhāvākārena paccupaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāya…pe… paccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. Vāyodhātuyā kiccādhikatāya āha ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhānavāyodhātupadaṭṭhānā’’ti. Vacīghosassa hetubhāvapaccupaṭṭhānāti vuttanayeneva vacīghosasaṅkhātassa cittajasaddassa hetubhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā.
不过,这里有些人说:“既然说‘以撞击为缘’,那就是在撞击之后声音才生起,所以心等起的地界只是对所执受的(色法)做撞击而已;在撞击的那一刹那,只有时节等起的声音才生起,而那个声音因为是以心为缘,所以间接地被称为‘心等起’。”按照他们的主张,纯粹由心生起的声音就根本得不到了。因此,不应该这样理解,而应该这样把握:就像烧水的时候,声音是在水的内部生起一样,当所执受的(色法)受到撞击时,与心等起的地界生起的同时,就在那个色聚当中,作为第九种法,内在的、由(四大)所造的声音便生起了。所以,心等起的声音也是依语表的方式而生起的;而弹指等声音,因为没有语表,就只是以心为缘的时节等起而已。巴利
Keci panettha ‘‘ghaṭṭane paccayoti vuttattā ghaṭṭanānantaraṃ saddassa uppatti hotīti gahetvā cittasamuṭṭhānapathavīdhātu upādinnaghaṭṭanamattaṃ karoti, ghaṭṭitakkhaṇe utusamuṭṭhānova saddo uppajjati, so pana cittapaccayattā pariyāyena cittasamuṭṭhānoti vuccatī’’ti vadanti. Tesaṃ matena cittajasaddoyeva na labbhati, tasmā evaṃ aggahetvā udakatāpanakāle antoudakeyeva uppajjanakasaddo viya upādinne ghaṭṭetvā uppajjamānacittasamuṭṭhānapathavīdhātuyā uppattisamakālameva tasmiṃ kalāpe navamaṃ hutvā antoyeva bhūtikasaddo uppajjatīti gahetabbaṃ, tasmā cittasamuṭṭhānasaddopi vacīviññattivaseneva uppajjati, accharāpaharaṇādisaddo pana vacīviññattiyā abhāvato cittapaccayautusamuṭṭhānoyevāti.
688 因为没有形体,所以不能割、不能切,这就是虚空;它本身就是虚空,所以说“不能割,所以是虚空”。那么,它是什么呢?回答说:“是诸色法的空隙”,意思是耳孔等色法之间的空隙。这是用来说明无碍虚空。而“凡……者,为分界”这句话,则是用来说明这里所指的虚空,不过那个虚空是依照惯用语才被称为虚空的。巴利
688. Viggahābhāvato na kassati, kasituṃ chindituṃ na sakkotīti akāso, soyeva ākāsoti āha ‘‘na kassatīti ākāso’’ti, ko panesoti āha ‘‘rūpānaṃ vivaro’’ti, kaṇṇacchiddādirūpānaṃ antaranti attho. Anena ajaṭākāsamāha. Yo…pe… paricchedoti pana iminā idhādhippetamākāsaṃ, so pana ruḷhīvasena ākāsoti pavuccati.
它划分诸色,或者自己又被那些色所划分,或者只是那些色的分界,所以叫“色之分界”;这是它的特相,所以说“以色之分界为特相”。因为它就像是在划分每一个色聚一样,所以说“它的作用是显示色的边际”。意思是:“这是诸色的下边际,这是上边际”——这样把它显示出来的作用,就是它的功能。从义理上说,由于它只是作为诸色的分界而被把握,所以说“以色法的界限为现起”。这里有人问:那么,这个虚空界在划分诸色时,是从四等起色聚来划分,还是从一等起多个色聚来划分,还是从一一等起一一色聚来划分,还是从一一色来划分呢?应当知道,是从一一等起一一色聚来划分的。巴利
Rūpāni paricchindati, sayaṃ vā tehi paricchijjati, tesaṃ vā paricchedamattanti rūpaparicchedo, taṃ lakkhaṇametassāti rūpaparicchedalakkhaṇo. Ayañhi taṃ taṃ rūpakalāpaṃ paricchindanto viya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘rūpapariyantappakāsanaraso’’ti. ‘‘Ayaṃ rūpānaṃ heṭṭhimo pariyanto, ayaṃ uparimo’’ti evaṃ vibhāvanakiccoti attho. Atthato pana yasmā rūpānaṃ paricchedamattaṃ hutvā gayhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpamariyādapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti. Etthāha – kiṃ panesa rūpe paricchindanto catusamuṭṭhānakalāpato paricchindati, atha ekasamuṭṭhānabahukalāpato, udāhu ekekasamuṭṭhānaekekakalāpato, ekekarūpato vāti? Ekekasamuṭṭhānaekekakalāpatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如果它从四等起色聚来划分,或者从一等起多个色聚来划分,那么在这种情况下,它要么会以“被触”的状态作为现起,要么就会导致不同色聚中的色法也像同一色聚中的色法一样,成为不可分离的状态。又或者,如果它从一一色法来划分,那么在这种情况下,同一色聚中的色法也会像不同色聚中的色法一样,变成互相分离的状态。但这两种结果都不合意,因此应当理解为:它是从一一等起一一色聚来划分的。巴利
Yadi hi catusamuṭṭhānakalāpato, ekasamuṭṭhānabahukalāpato vā paricchindati, evaṃ sati samphuṭṭhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno vā paricchindeyya, ekakalāpagatarūpānaṃ viya nānākalāpagatarūpānampi avinibbhogavuttitā vā āpajjeyya. Atha vā ekekarūpato paricchindati, evaṃ sati ekekakalāpagatarūpānampi nānākalāpagatarūpānaṃ viya aññamaññavinibbhogavuttitāpasaṅgo siyā, ubhayampi panetaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ, tasmā ekekasamuṭṭhānaekekakalāpato paricchindatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“以未触状态和孔隙间隙状态而现起”,意思就是说“以未触状态而现起”,或者说“以孔隙间隙状态而现起”。其中,在某个色聚里,诸大种之间有界限划分,正由于以不被那些大种所触的状态而现起,所以说“以未触状态而现起”。虽然不同色聚中的诸大种确实互相接触,并且以单一坚实团块的方式生起,但在法上,它们彼此之间是分离的、不混杂的。它们彼此之间的这种分离、不混杂,就是界限划分。它就像不被其他大种所触一样,也不被这些大种所触;如果不是这样,由于诸大种会变成互相遍满,它们就不可能有什么被划分出来的界限。因为不互相遍满,就是未触。因此,世尊在解释这个含义时说:“不被四大种所触。”巴利
Asamphuṭṭhabhāvachiddavivarabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno vāti asamphuṭṭhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno vā chiddavivarabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, teheva asamphuṭṭhabhāvena paccupaṭṭhānato asamphuṭṭhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno. Kiñcāpi hi kalāpantarabhūtā kalāpantarabhūtehi samphuṭṭhāva ekaghanapiṇḍabhāvena pavattattā, tathāpi dhammato aññamaññaṃ vivittattā asaṃkiṇṇā eva. Tesaṃ yā vivittatā aññamaññaṃ asaṃkiṇṇatā, ayaṃ paricchedo. Bhūtantarehi viya tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, itarathā paricchinnatā na siyā tesaṃ bhūtānaṃ byāpibhāvāpattito. Abyāpibhāvo hi asamphuṭṭhatā. Tenāha bhagavā imassa niddese ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti (dha. sa. 637).
或者也可以说:由于属于其他色聚的大种以彼此不混杂的方式呈现,所以说“以不触的状态而呈现”;由于以耳孔、口腔空隙等方式呈现出孔隙空隙的状态,所以说“以孔隙空隙的状态而呈现”。因为当色法被划分界限时,就有孔隙空隙的状态。对哪些色法作了划分,就在那里以它们被划分的状态而获得,所以说“以被划分的色法为近因”。巴利
Atha vā kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena paccupaṭṭhānato asamphuṭṭhatāpaccupaṭṭhānabhāvo vutto, kaṇṇacchiddamukhavivarādivasena chiddavivarabhāvassa paccupaṭṭhānato chiddavivarabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Rūpaparicchede hi sati chiddavivarabhāvo hoti. Yesaṃ rūpānaṃ paricchedo, tattheva tesaṃ paricchedabhāvena labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paricchinnarūpapadaṭṭhāno’’ti.
689-91 当讲到色的轻快性、色的柔软性、色的适业性这三者的解释时,意思是:说的就是这个。依照下面所说的方式——就像在非色的轻快性等当中,按照“身的轻快状态就是身轻快性”等所说的那样——应当同样以“色的轻快状态就是轻快性”等与色相关联的方式,来理解色的变化。色的轻快状态就是轻快性,它以色的沉重状态的止息为特征,以破除沉重状态为作用,以不迟钝为显现,以轻快的色为近因。色的柔软状态就是柔软性,它以色的僵硬状态的止息为特征,以破除僵硬状态为作用,以在一切作用中无障碍为显现,以柔软的色为近因。色的适业状态就是适业性,它以色的不适业状态的止息为特征,以破除不适业状态为作用,以在身体动作中随顺为显现,以适业的色为近因。这里的含义,应依照我们在各处所说的来理解。为了显示这三者是色的变化状态,所以称为“色的变化”,因此说“三者……分别说明”。巴利
689-91.Rūpassalahutādittayaniddeseti rūpassalahutā rūpassamudutā rūpassakammaññatāti imassa rūpalahutādittayassa niddese sampatte idaṃ vuccatīti adhippāyo. Heṭṭhā vuttanayenevāti arūpassa lahutādīsu ‘‘kāyalahubhāvo kāyalahutā’’tiādinā vuttanayānusāreneva ‘‘rūpassa lahubhāvo lahutā’’tiādinā rūpasambandhībhāvena rūpavikārāpi viññātabbā. Rūpassa lahubhāvo lahutā, sā rūpassa garubhāvavūpasamalakkhaṇā, garubhāvanimmaddanarasā, adandhatāpaccupaṭṭhānā, lahurūpapadaṭṭhānā. Rūpassa mudubhāvo mudutā, sā rūpassa thaddhabhāvavūpasamalakkhaṇā, thaddhabhāvanimmaddanarasā, sabbakiriyāsu avirodhitāpaccupaṭṭhānā, mudurūpapadaṭṭhānā. Rūpassa kammaññabhāvo kammaññatā, sā rūpassa akammaññabhāvavūpasamalakkhaṇā, akammaññabhāvanimmaddanarasā, sarīrakiriyāsu anukūlabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, kammaññarūpapadaṭṭhānāti. Attho panettha tattha tattha amhehi vuttānusārena veditabbo. Imā pana tisso rūpānaṃ vikārabhāvato ‘‘rūpavikārā’’ti vuccantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso…pe… vibhāvinā’’ti vuttaṃ.
这三者应当依次理解为:由对治“使色变得迟缓的界动乱”的缘所生;由对治“使色变得僵硬的界动乱”的缘所生;由对治“使色在身体动作中不随顺的界动乱”的缘所生。其中,“界动乱”指风、胆、痰的紊乱,或者味等界的变异状态。虽然这里分成两种来说,但从意义上看,应当知道这只是地界等的变异。对治缘就是适宜的时节、食物,以及心不散乱。不过,这是就它们各自变异的特殊情况而说的;从一般意义上说,它们都是(轻性、软性、适业性)这三者的缘,因为这三者任何时候都不互相分离。可是,不互相分离的东西,其差别很难分辨,为了说明这种差别,才说了“这些”等话。连接关系是:按顺序举例说明。因为轻性以无病的人为例子,软性以揉熟的皮革为例子,适业性以炼净的黄金为例子。巴利
Yathākkamaṃ panetā rūpassa dandhattakaradhātukkhobhapaṭipakkhapaccayasamuṭṭhānā, thaddhattakaradhātukkhobhapaṭipakkhapaccayasamuṭṭhānā, rūpānaṃ sarīrakiriyāsu ananukūlabhāvakaradhātukkhobhapaṭipakkhapaccayasamuṭṭhānāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha dhātukkhobhoti vātapittasemhapakopo, rasādidhātūnaṃ vā vikārāvatthā, dvidhā vuttāpi atthato pathavīdhātuādīnaṃyeva vikāroti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭipakkhapaccayā sappāyautuāhārāvikkhittacittatā, sā ca taṃtaṃvikārassa visesapaccayabhāvato vuttā, avisesena pana sabbesaṃ paccayā, tathā hi te kadācipi aññamaññaṃ na vijahanti. Tathā avijahantānaṃ pana dubbijānīyaṃ nānattanti taṃpakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘etāsa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kamatova nidassananti sambandho. Lahutāya hi arogī nidassanaṃ, mudutāya madditacammaṃ, kammaññatāya sudhantasuvaṇṇaṃ.
这里,先说以无病者作例子是合适的,因为他的色法相续被根所摄;但揉熟的皮革和炼净的黄金又怎么能作例子呢?在非根所摄的色法相续中,轻性等确实不可能存在,因为缺少对治界动乱的缘,不是吗?确实如此。这只是用类似的东西来显示软性和适业性的样子,并不是说那些东西里真有这里所说的软性和适业性的自性。如果是这样,那棉絮等物中的轻性等又是怎么回事呢?在究竟意义上,那里并没有轻性等;但因为缺少重性等,所以那里就假立了轻性等说法。巴利
Nanu cettha arogino tāva nidassanaṃ yuttaṃ tassa indriyabaddhasantānattā, suparimadditacammasudhantasuvaṇṇānaṃ pana kathaṃ. Na hi anindriyabaddharūpasantāne lahutādīni sambhavanti tathā dhātukkhobhapaṭipakkhapaccayābhāvato? Saccaṃ, mudukammaññasadisarūpanidassanamattametaṃ, na pana tattha idhādhippetamudutākammaññatāsabhāvato. Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ tūlapicuādīsu lahubhāvādikanti? Na tattha paramatthato lahubhāvādikaṃ atthi, garubhāvādihetūnaṃ pana abhāvato tattha lahubhāvādivohāro.
它不能完全造作这个业,因为必须观待它们当下的缘;否则,轻性等就应该一直存在。无迟缓性是它的特征,也就是没有重性的状态。去除、驱逐、遣散重性,是它的作用,所以叫破除重性之味。虽然它不能去除诸色的重性,但由于对治重色的无迟缓色发生了变异,就像生起令其生起等说法一样,这是依方便说它去除了重性。因为当它存在时,所生起的色确实只是无重性而已。软性和适业性也是同样的道理。不过,心所的轻性等是以摧毁各自对立的种种不善法的方式生起的,由于它们只是变异的状态,所以应当知道,它们的作用是直接成立的。以轻快转起为现起,意思是像无迟缓、无病的人一次又一次地来回走动那样,以无迟缓的转起而现起。哪种色有轻性,就在那里以变异的状态被认知,所以是以轻色为近因。其余二者也是这样。不僵硬性就是不坚硬性。以自身的柔软性,在一切作用中都不违逆而现起,所以是无违逆现起。因为柔软在任何地方都不违逆。在这三处中,前缀a-表示对立的意思。有些人说:轻性等是由迟缓性等的对治缘所产生的。另一些人说:它排除有情。被称为身体作用随顺的适业状态,是它的特征,所以是身体作用随顺适业性之特征。不适业就是衰弱,因此适业性被说为无衰弱状态的现起。巴利
Kammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti ekantena tāsaṃ paccuppannapaccayāpekkhattā, itarathā sabbadābhāvinīhi lahutādīhi bhavitabbaṃ siyāti. Adandhatālakkhaṇāti agarubhāvalakkhaṇā. Garubhāvassa vinodanaṃ khipanaṃ apanayanaṃ kiccametissāti garubhāvavinodanarasā. Kiñcāpi hi ayaṃ rūpānaṃ garubhāvaṃ vinodetuṃ na sakkoti, garurūpapaṭipakkhānaṃ pana adandharūpānaṃ vikārattā ‘‘jāti naṃ uppādetī’’tiādīsu viya pariyāyena garubhāvaṃ vinodeti nāma. Tassañhi vijjamānāyaṃ uppannarūpānaṃ agarubhāvoyevāti. Esa nayo mudutākammaññatāsu. Cetasikalahutādayo pana attano attano paccanīkānaṃ taṃtaṃakusaladhammānaṃ viddhaṃsakabhāvena pavattantīti vikāramattabhāvato nippariyāyeneva tāsaṃ taṃkiccatā labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lahuparivattitapaccupaṭṭhānāti adandhassa arogīpurisassa aparāparaṃ saṅkanti parivattanaṃ viya adandhaparivattanaṃ hutvā paccupaṭṭhānāti attho. Yassa rūpassa lahutā, tattheva vikārabhāvena upalabbhanato lahurūpapadaṭṭhānā. Evamitarāsupi. Athaddhatāti akathinatā. Attano mudubhāveneva sabbakiriyāsu aviruddhā hutvā paccupaṭṭhātīti avirodhitāpaccupaṭṭhānā. Mudu hi katthaci na virujjhati. Tīsupi ṭhānesu paṭipakkhatthe a-kāro. Dandhatādihetūnaṃ paṭipakkhasamuṭṭhānattā lahutādīnanti keci. Apare pana sattāpaṭisedheti vadanti. Sarīrena kattabbakiriyānaṃ anukūlatāsaṅkhāto kammaññabhāvo lakkhaṇametissāti sarīrakiriyānukūlakammaññabhāvalakkhaṇā. Akammaññaṃ dubbalaṃ nāma hotīti kammaññatā adubbalabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā vuttā.
692 在“色的积集”等说法中,所谓ācaya,是指已生成之色从最初开始的聚集,或者说,就像依各自的缘从各处汇聚而来一样,被称为ācaya的色之初生与增长;因为在“upaññattaṃ upasittaṃ”等说法里,前缀upa-表示最初和后续之义,所以它在总说中被叫作upacaya。而那些同样的色以不断延续的方式、以不断延续之力而进行,这被称为相续。因为在结生刹那,色的生起等具有最初聚集的性质,所以叫ācaya;此后直到第十七个心生起,由于具有增长的性质,所以叫upacaya。因为那时色只有由业、心、时节所生的增长,并没有减损。或者,直到由食生起的色生起,或者眼等生起为止,叫upacaya;此后直到死亡为止,叫相续。这样说明之后——巴利
692.Rūpānamācayo yotiādīsu yo nipphannarūpānaṃ ādito cayo, yathāpaccayaṃ tato tato āgatassa viya cayoti vā ācayasaṅkhāto rūpānaṃ paṭhamuppādo vaḍḍhi ca, so upacayoti uddese vutto ‘‘upaññattaṃ upasitta’’ntiādīsu viya upa-saddassa paṭhamūpariatthadassanato. Yā pana tesaṃyeva rūpānaṃ anuppabandhatā anuppabandhavasena pavatti, sā santatīti pavuccati. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe hi rūpuppattiādicayabhāvato ācayo nāma, tato paraṃ yāva sattarasamacittuppādā vaḍḍhibhāvato upacayo nāma. Tadā hi rūpassa kammacittautūhi cayoyeva, na hāni. Atha vā yāva āhārasamuṭṭhāna rūpuppādo, cakkhādiuppādo vā, tāva upacayo nāma, tato paraṃ pana cutipariyosānaṃ santati nāma. Evañca katvā –
凡是诸处的积集,就是色的积集;色的积集,就是色的相续。巴利
‘‘Yo āyatanānaṃ ācayo, so rūpassa upacayo. Yo rūpassa upacayo, sā rūpassa santatī’’ti (dha. sa. 641-642) –
为了说明积集和相续在含义上并无差别,注释书中这样引述了经文:巴利
Evaṃ upacayasantatīnaṃ atthato nānattābhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuttāya pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
先说明“积集”就是生起,“累积”就是增长,“相续”就是转起;接着又说:就像在河边挖的井里,水开始涌出的阶段,就是“积集”生起;水充满的阶段,就是“累积”增长;水漫出来往外流的阶段,就是“相续”转起。巴利
‘‘Ācayo nāma nibbatti, upacayo nāma vaḍḍhi, santati nāma pavattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘nadītīre khatakūpasmiñhi udakuggamanakālo viya ācayo nibbatti, paripuṇṇakālo viya upacayo vaḍḍhi, ajjhottharitvā gamanakālo viya santati pavattī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 641; visuddhi. 2.444) –
比喻已经说过了。这里“色法的积集”这个说法用的是复数形式,意思是:“生起”就是正在生起的诸色法的变化。既然有变化,那么由于变化本身与具有变化的法并非一体,即使在同一刹那,众多正在生起的色法,它们的生起变化也是各自各别的,而不是一个整体聚合成一个变化——这一点已经表明了。而且,不只是色法的生起是这样的,非色法的生起、色法与非色法的老性、无常性,以及色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性,也应当这样理解。巴利
Upamā vuttā. ‘‘Rūpānamācayo’’ti cettha bahuvacananiddesena uppādo nāma uppajjamānānaṃ vikāro. Vikāratte ca sati attano vikāravantadhammabhedabhinnattā ekakkhaṇepi uppajjamānānaṃ bahūnampi rūpānaṃ visuṃ visuṃyeva uppādavikārabhāvo, na piṇḍassevāti dīpitaṃ hoti. Na kevalañca rūpānameva uppatti īdisī, atha kho arūpadhammānampi uppādo rūpārūpadhammānaṃ jaratā, aniccatā, rūpassa lahumudukammaññatā cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
693 “生色”在注释书里被解释为:因为两者都具有色法生起的本质,这是(注释者的)意图。如果真是这样,那为什么(世尊)要分别解说呢?因为世尊正是那样教导的。那世尊又为什么那样教导呢?回答说“因为所说的行相差别”等等。行相的差别在前面已经阐明过了。字的初次生起是“积集”,反复生起是“相续”。应当这样理解三种所生起的色法,他们就是这样说明这些(色法)的行相差别的。或者,是随顺所化众生的根机而说的:据说当时听众心里生起了这样的想法:“这个‘生’是一切法的根源,而它自身却不从任何地方生起,就像自性论者所说的‘自性’那样。”为了破除他们这种错误的执取,并显示“所谓‘生’并不是别的什么,只是依积集与相续而安立的色法生起本身被这样称呼而已,而这个生起,对于生起者来说,只是依于诸缘而获得‘已生’的同义语”,因此论师们把它分成积集和相续两部分来教导。巴利
693.Jātirūpanti dīpitaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu ubhayassapi rūpuppādasabhāvattāti adhippāyo. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā vibhajja vuttaṃ? Bhagavatā tatheva desitattā. Bhagavatāpi kasmā tathā desitanti āha ‘‘vuttamākāranānattā’’tiādi. Ākāranānattaṃ heṭṭhā vibhāvitameva. Akkharassa paṭhamuppatti upacayo, punappunaṃ uppatti santati. Evaṃ tisamuṭṭhānarūpānampi daṭṭhabbanti evaṃ tesaṃ ākāranānattaṃ vaṇṇenti. Veneyyānaṃ vasena vāti tadā kira sotūnaṃ evaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ, ayaṃ jāti sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ pabhavo, sayaṃ pana na kutoci jāyati, yathā taṃ ‘‘pakativādīnaṃ pakatī’’ti. Tesaṃ micchāgāhaṃ vidhamento ‘‘jāti nāma na aññā, upacayasantativasena ṭhitā rūpuppattiyeva pana tathā vuccati, sā ca yassa uppādo , tassa paccayeheva jātapariyāyaṃ labbhatī’’ti dassanatthaṃ upacayo santatīti dvidhā bhinditvā desetīti ācariyā.
从过去方面、从过去的部分来说,意思就是从未来存在的状态来说。当色法正在生起时,生起就像把它从未来刹那中冒出来一样,所以说“有令冒出的作用”。就像在说“请接受这些色法”而把它们交出去一样,它被理解为,所以说“有交出去的现起”。圆满状态的现起,应当依照“向上堆集故为积集”这个意思来理解。就像到达生起刹那的色法,依最初之业、依彼缘之力而被称为“已生”,同样,处于生起刹那的色法被称为“已积集”,所以说“以已积集的色为近因”。巴利
Pubbantato pubbakoṭṭhāsato, anāgatabhāvatoti attho. Uppajjamāne rūpadhamme uppādo anāgatakkhaṇato ummujjāpento viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ummujjāpanaraso’’ti. ‘‘Ime rūpadhammā sampaṭicchatha ne’’ti niyyātento viya gayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘niyyātanapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti. Paripuṇṇabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānatā upari cayo upacayoti imassa atthassa vasena veditabbā. Yathā uppādakkhaṇappattaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti ādikamme tappaccayavasena, evaṃ uppādakkhaṇagataṃ upacitaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upacitarūpapadaṭṭhāno’’ti.
以持续生起为特征:应当理解为,那些以相续不断的方式正在生起的色法,它们的持续生起就是其特征。以相续不断为作用:就是以先后相续的方式起作用。因为如果生起不存在,就不会有以先后方式相续不断。正因为相续不断的作用本身应当被理解为无间断,所以说“以无间断为现起”。因为它在以先后方式组合起来的色法中被观察到,所以说“以相续不断的色法为近因”。巴利
Pavattilakkhaṇāti anuppabandhato uppattivasena pavattamānarūpānaṃ pavattananti lakkhitabbā. Anuppabandhanarasāti pubbāparavasena anuppabandhanakiccā. Asati hi uppāde pubbāparavasena anuppabandho na siyā. Anuppabandharasattāyeva anupacchedavasena gahetabbato āha ‘‘anupacchedapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. Pubbāparavasena ghaṭitarūpesu upalabbhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘anuppabandharūpapadaṭṭhānā’’ti.
694 “老”就是衰老的状态,意思是年轻状态的丧失。巴利
694.Jīraṇanti jiṇṇabhāvo, abhinavabhāvahānīti attho.
色法中的老是明显的,因为从牙齿等处的破损等变化可以看出来;而其他(非色法的老)因为不具备这种变化,所以不明显。当然,色法的刹那老也是隐蔽的,它也被称为“无间老”。不过,为了显示非色法的老极其隐蔽,才不加区分地说“在色法中明显”。但破损等变化在刹那老中并不存在。色的成熟就是色法的衰老,达到衰老的必然坏灭,所以说“引近的作用”,意思是指向坏灭的作用。即使自性没有消失,比如坚硬等自性没有消失——因为住刹那中名为老,而那时并不舍弃法之自性。新状态是生起的状态,以它的离去而把握,所以说“以新状态的离去为现起”。如同稻谷的陈旧状态——即使稻谷的状态没有消失,也如同稻谷的陈旧状态能令新状态离去。稻谷的陈旧状态能除去一切状态,而这个(老)仅仅除去生起的状态。从各方面、从一切处坏灭,应当这样理解,所以是“遍破损相”。常名为恒久,然而色由于刹那坏灭故非常,即无常,其状态为无常性。而它令达到住时的色以住时即坏灭的方式好像下沉一样,所以是“下沉的作用”。又因为它从坏灭的状态以尽与灭的方式被把握,所以说“以尽灭状态为现起”。次第的毁灭名为尽,如同灯芯与油一起灭尽,一起灭尽名为灭,他们这样说。巴利
Pākaṭā rūpadhammesu khaṇḍiccādibhāvena dantādīsu vikāradassanato, itarā tadabhāvato apākaṭā. Kāmaṃ rūpadhammānampi khaṇikajarā paṭicchannā eva, yā ‘‘avīcijarā’’ti vā vuccati. Arūpadhammānaṃ pana jarāya suṭṭhu paṭicchannabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘pākaṭā rūpadhammesū’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ. Khaṇḍiccādivikāro pana khaṇikajarāya natthi. Rūpaparipāko rūpadhammānaṃ jiṇṇatā, jaraṃ pattassa bhaṅgo avassaṃbhāvīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upanayanarasā’’ti, bhaṅgūpanayanakiccāti attho. Sabhāvānapagamepītikakkhaḷattādisabhāvānapagamepi, ṭhitikkhaṇe hi jarā nāma, na ca tadā dhammasabhāvaṃ vijahati. Navabhāvo uppādāvatthā, tassā apagamabhāvena gayhatīti āha ‘‘navabhāvāpagamapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. Vīhipurāṇabhāvo viyāti vīhibhāvānapagamepi abhinavabhāvāpagamanakaro vīhipurāṇabhāvo viya. Vīhipurāṇabhāvo sabbāvatthāni apaneti, ayaṃ pana kevalaṃ uppādāvatthameva apaneti. Parito sabbato bhijjananti lakkhitabbāti paribhedalakkhaṇā. Niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ, rūpaṃ pana khaṇabhaṅgitāya na niccanti aniccaṃ, tassa bhāvo aniccatā. Sā pana ṭhitippattarūpaṃ ṭhitiyameva vināsanabhāvena saṃsīdentī viya hotīti saṃsīdanarasā. Yasmā ca sā bhaṅgabhāvato khayavayākāreneva gayhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khayavayabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. Anukkamena vināso khayo nāma, dīpavaṭṭikāya saha telassa viya saha nirodho vayoti vadanti.
696-7 “聚合”是指聚集。所谓“有些人”,是指无畏山寺的住众。他们主张昏沉是色法,或者说持有昏沉之论,所以被称为昏沉论者。所谓“昏沉色法”,是指由时节、心和食物三种缘所生的、名为昏沉的色法。上下文的意思是:这些人应当被驳斥。怎样驳斥呢?就说“牟尼……”等偈颂。没有盖障:因为入流道断除了疑盖,不还道断除了欲贪盖、嗔恚盖和恶作盖,阿拉汉道断除了昏沉睡眠盖。这里的意思是:如果昏沉是色法,那它就不应被断除。色蕴是应当被了知、应当被遍知的,而不是应当被断除、应当被修习、应当被证得的。按照《法集论》(1407)所说:“哪些法不是由见所断、也不是由修所断?四地中的善法、四地中的果报、三地中的唯作无记、色法与涅槃——这些法不是由见所断、也不是由修所断。”因为色法没有断除这回事。如果这样,那它作为盖障的性质就相违了,因为盖障是应当被断除的。盖障不可能不被断除——巴利
696-7.Samodhānatoti rāsito. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Middharūpassa vadanasīlā, middhavādo vā etesanti middhavādino. Middharūpaṃ nāmāti utucittāhāravasena tisamuṭṭhānaṃ middhaṃ nāma rūpaṃ. Te paṭikkhipitabbāti sambandho. Kathaṃ paṭikkhipitabbāti āha ‘‘munīsī’’tiādi. Natthi nīvaraṇāti sotāpattimaggena vicikicchānīvaraṇassa, anāgāmimaggena kāmacchandabyāpādakukkuccanīvaraṇānaṃ, arahattamaggena thinamiddhanīvaraṇānañca pahīnattā. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yadi middhaṃ rūpaṃ siyā, appahātabbaṃ bhaveyya. Rūpakkhandho abhiññeyyo pariññeyyo na pahātabbo na bhāvetabbo na sacchikātabbo. ‘‘Katame dhammā nevadassanenanabhāvanāyapahātabbā. Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ, catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko, tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ, rūpañca nibbānañca, ime dhammā nevadassanenanabhāvanāyapahātabbā’’ti (dha. sa. 1407) vacanena rūpadhammānaṃ pahānābhāvato. Evañca sati tassa nīvaraṇabhāvo virujjheyya nīvaraṇānaṃ pahātabbattā. Na hi nīvaraṇānaṃ appahātabbatte –
我过去心里的疑惑,那位具眼者已经为我讲清楚了。
你确实是牟尼、正等觉者,你已没有诸盖。巴利
‘‘Yā me kaṅkhā pure āsi, taṃ me akkhāsi cakkhumā; Addhā munīsi sambuddho, natthi nīvaraṇā tavā’’ti. (su. ni. 546) –
以断除诸盖来称扬世尊,这才说得通。如果有人问:“照‘比丘们,色不是你们的,应当舍弃它’这类经文来看,不是也说明色是应当被断除的吗?”并不是这样,因为那里指的是断除对色这一所缘的欲贪。所以世尊说:“比丘们,对色调伏欲贪,就是在那里的断除。”然而,也不能说“这里并非只是依断除对彼所缘的欲贪而说的”,因为这里有能证成的经文,而且这里并不意指断除欲贪等。所以,由于与“你已无诸盖”等说法相违,昏沉不是色。巴利
Nīvaraṇappahānena bhagavato thomanaṃ yujjeyya. Yadi siyā, ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahathātiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.247; saṃ. ni. 3.33-34) rūpassa pahātabbatāpi paññāyatīti? Taṃ na, tabbisayachandarāgappahānassa tattha adhippetattā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, rūpe chandarāgavinayo, taṃ tattha pahāna’’nti. Na ca panetaṃ na sakkā vattuṃ etthāpi ‘‘tabbisayachandarāgappahānavaseneva vutta’’nti sādhakavacanabhāvato, kāmacchandādīnaṃ tattha pahānassa anadhippetattā ca, tasmā ‘‘natthi nīvaraṇā tavā’’tiādivacanehi virujjhanato na middhaṃ rūpanti.
如果对方又顽固地执取自己的主张,认为这里所说的断除盖,就是依断除对那所缘境的欲贪而说的,那么为了驳斥他,论师再次引出昏沉睡眠盖与无明盖相应的说法,而说“昏沉睡眠盖”等话。应当理解为:昏沉睡眠盖和无明盖都与盖相应。这里说的是:依据“四种相应”的说法,只有非色法才能互相相应,色法既不能互相相应,也不能与非色法相应。因此,如果睡眠是色法,它就不配用“相应”这个词。假如有人想:这里可以像“碎石堆、鱼群,或行或住”等说法那样,理解为按现有情况来说。正如在“碎石堆、鱼群,或行或住”等说法中,碎石堆本身不能行走,行走是就鱼群而言,住则就两者而言,这样按现有情况来搭配;同样,这里“相应”是就昏沉而言,“盖”是就两者而言吗?这也不对,因为色法的体性本身就不成立。只有色法的体性成立时,由于相应不可能存在,按现有情况来搭配才说得通。仅凭这些,睡眠的非色法体性已经成立,但为了让像两次捆缚成为牢固之缚那样,成为由众多经典证成、不可破坏的定论,论师又引出《发趣大论》中该分别里所说的“于无色……生起”的无色有生起,而说“大论发趣”等。禅定爱味等从法上说属于贪等,与欲贪盖等无别,所以说“欲贪盖”等。巴利
Yadi pana paro daḷhamūḷhaggāhitāya taṃvisayachandarāgappahānavaseneva nīvaraṇappahānaṃ adhippetanti sakavādaṃ oḍḍeyya, tassa tannisedhanatthaṃ puna thinamiddhanīvaraṇassa avijjānīvaraṇena saha sampayogavacanañca āharanto āha ‘‘thinamiddhanīvaraṇa’’ntiādi. Thinamiddhanīvaraṇañceva avijjānīvaraṇañca nīvaraṇena sampayuttanti sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘catūhi sampayogo’’ti (dhātu. 3) vacanato arūpadhammānameva aññamaññassa sampayogo labbhati, na rūpadhammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ arūpena vā, tasmā yadi middhaṃ rūpaṃ siyā, na taṃ sampayogavacanamarahatīti. Atha siyā – yathālābhavacanamettha sakkā viññātuṃ, ‘‘sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.249) viya. Yathā hi ‘‘sakkharakathalikaṃ macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampī’’tiādīsu sakkharakathalikassa caraṇāyogato macchagumbāpekkhāya caraṇaṃ, ubhayāpekkhāya ṭhānanti evaṃ yathālābho yojīyati, evamidhāpi thināpekkhāya sampayogavacanaṃ, ubhayāpekkhāya nīvaraṇavacananti? Tampi na, rūpabhāvasseva asiddhattā. Siddhe hi rūpabhāve asambhavato yathālābhayojanā yujjeyyāti. Ettakeneva middhassa arūpabhāve siddhepi yathā dvikkhattuṃ bandhaṃ subandhaṃ hoti, evamanekasuttasādhitaṃ appadhaṃsiyaṃ hotīti paṭṭhānappakaraṇe ‘‘nīvaraṇaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca…pe… paccayā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.8.8) imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘arūpe…pe… uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.8.8) vuttaṃ arūpabhavuppattimpi āharanto āha ‘‘mahāpakaraṇapaṭṭhāne’’tiādi. Jhānanikantiādīnampi dhammato lobhādibhāvato kāmacchandanīvaraṇādīhi abhinnattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmacchandanīvaraṇa’’ntiādi.
这里可能会有人提出:在“比丘们,有这五种障碍、盖”(《增支部》5.51)等经文里,昏沉睡眠是作为盖一起被提到的,所以这里也把它合在一起说为“昏沉睡眠盖”;可是在无色界中,只有昏沉生起,那昏沉和睡眠两者都会生起吗?这种说法站不住脚,因为恶作并没有被纳入。如果仅仅因为在那边是一起提到的,这里也就应该一起纳入,那么恶作在那边也是一起说的,这里也就有可能被纳入,但这里并没有这样,而只说了掉举盖。因此,不能阻止它在无色界中生起。用“等”字所收摄的经文有:“比丘们,这纯粹是不善聚,也就是五盖”(《增支部》5.52);“舍弃了这五盖,就是离昏沉睡眠者;因为那昏沉睡眠已被舍弃、吐弃、解脱、断除、出离,所以称为离昏沉睡眠者;此心从这昏沉睡眠中净化、清净、遍净、解脱、令解脱、遍解脱”(《分别论》551)等等。巴利
Ettha siyā – ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, āvaraṇā nīvaraṇā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.51) thinamiddhassa nīvaraṇabhāvena ekato āgatattā idhāpi ‘‘thinamiddhanīvaraṇa’’nti ekato vuttaṃ, thinameva ca pana arūpabhave uppajjati thinamiddhanti? Tayidamasāraṃ, kukkuccassa na gahitattā. Yadi hi ekato gahitamatteneva idhāpi ekato gahaṇaṃ siyā, kukkuccassapi tattha ekato vuttassa idha gahaṇaṃ sambhaveyya, na ca panevaṃ atthi uddhaccanīvaraṇantveva vuttattā, tasmā na tassa arūpabhavuppattiṃ sakkā paṭibāhitunti. Ādi-saddena ‘‘kevalo hāyaṃ, bhikkhave, akusalarāsi, yadidaṃ pañca nīvaraṇā (a. ni. 5.52), ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya, vigatathinamiddhoti tassa thinamiddhassa cattattā vantattā muttattā pahīnattā paṭinissaṭṭhattā, tena vuccati vigatathinamiddhoti, idaṃ cittaṃ imamhā thinamiddhamhā sodheti visodheti parisodheti moceti vimoceti parimoceti vā’’ti (vibha. 551) evamādiṃ pāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
即使睡眠可以分为两种:色法和非色法。其中,非色法的那种,在诸盖的教说中已经说到了,难道不是吗?那也不是,因为没有特别区分说明。确实,在诸盖的教说中并没有特别区分睡眠而说:“比丘们,凡是惛沉,那也是盖;凡是睡眠,那也是盖;惛沉睡眠是盖”——因为这段总说是不加区分的,所以即使设想睡眠有两种,也不能否定它作为盖的性质。因为可以说:那种被设想为不同于非色法的睡眠,由于具有睡眠的本性,也同样像另一个盖一样是盖。如果你们不接受睡眠有色的性质,那么世尊的睡眠又是怎么回事呢?难道不是因为《分别论》中以“睡眠、昏昏欲睡”等说法,已经成立了睡眠就是睡眠的性质吗?并非如此。就像阴性词等的情况一样,因为睡眠是睡眠的因,所以以睡眠的特征来分别解说。即便如此,如果作为睡眠之因的睡眠不存在,那世尊的睡眠又是怎么回事呢?不能说“世尊没有那种睡眠”,因为经中说“火种,我了知……白天睡觉”,所以世尊的睡眠不是由睡眠引起的,而是由身体的不适所致;也不能说“世尊没有那种身体不适”,因为经中说“我的背痛,我要伸展一下”。在这里不应执定“只有睡眠才是睡眠之因”,因此还有别的睡眠之因。那是什么呢?是身体的不适。所以应当知道:世尊的睡眠不是以睡眠为因的。巴利
Yadipi siyā duvidhaṃ middhaṃ rūpaṃ, arūpañca. Tattha yaṃ arūpaṃ, taṃ nīvaraṇesu desitaṃ, na rūpanti? Tampi na, visesavacanābhāvato. Na hi visesetvā middhaṃ nīvaraṇesu desitaṃ ‘‘yadapi, bhikkhave, thinaṃ, tadapi nīvaraṇaṃ, yadapi middhaṃ, tadapi nīvaraṇaṃ, thinamiddhaṃ nīvaraṇanti iti hidaṃ uddesaṃ āgacchatī’’ti avisesena vuttattā, tasmā middhassa duvidhataṃ parikappetvāpi na sakkā nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ nivattetuṃ. Sakkā hi vattuṃ yaṃ taṃ arūpato aññaṃ middhaṃ parikappitaṃ, tampi nīvaraṇaṃ middhasabhāvattā itaraṃ nīvaraṇaṃ viyāti. Yadi middhassa rūpabhāvaṃ na sampaṭicchatha, kathaṃ bhagavato niddā hoti, nanu middhassa ‘‘niddā pacalāyikā’’tiādinā vibhaṅge vuttattā niddābhāvo siddhoti? Nayidamevaṃ, itthiliṅgādīsu viya niddāhetuno middhassa niddābhāvena vibhattattā. Evampi niddāhetuno middhassa abhāvato kathaṃ bhagavato niddāti ce? Sā bhagavato natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ aggivessana…pe… divā supitā’’tiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.387) na niddā bhagavato middhena, atha kho sarīragelaññena, tañca bhagavato natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyati, tamahaṃ āyamissāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.22; saṃ. ni. 4.243) vacanato. Na cettha evamavadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘middhameva niddāhetū’’ti, tasmā aññopi atthi niddāhetu. Ko pana soti? Sarīragelaññaṃ, tasmā na bhagavato niddā middhahetukāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
698 逐一显示它们各自不存在,也就是从风界等开始,逐一显示它们各自没有。那么,该怎么显示呢?回答说“风界”等等。其中,所谓身力,从意义上说是风界活动方式的一种特别状态,因为它属于风界的扩散。愚人把它说成“力量”,所以说“取了风界,就等于取了力色”。产生,在欲界中是某些有情根成熟的缘,是水界活动方式的一种特别状态,所以说“水界的产生色”。取了它,就等于取了,这是句子的连接。没有离开增长和相续的色法生起,而且在生起的阶段,也没有别的所谓“生”,所以说“以增长和相续为生色”。即使是业所生的疾病,它的近因也是由不适条件所引起的界扰动,更不用说其他的了。从意义上说,它可能只存在于色法成熟的阶段,也就是住位和坏灭的刹那,所以说“以老、无常等,疾病色被取到”。巴利
698.Visuṃ visuṃ abhāvaṃ dassetvāti vāyodhātuādito visuṃ visuṃ natthibhāvaṃ dassetvā. Kathaṃ pana so dassitabboti āha ‘‘vāyodhātuyā’’tiādi. Tattha kāyabalaṃ nāma atthato vāyodhātuyā pavattiākāraviseso tassā vipphārabhāvato. Yato bālānaṃ balanti vadantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vāyodhātuyā gahitāya balarūpaṃ gahitamevā’’ti. Sambhavo kāmadhātuyaṃ ekaccasattānaṃ indriyaparipākapaccayo āpodhātuyā pavattiākāravisesoti āha ‘‘āpodhātuyā sambhavarūpa’’nti. Gahitāya gahitamevāti sambandho. Upacayasantativinimutto rūpuppādo natthi, uppādāvatthāya ca aññā jāti nāma natthevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘upacayasantatīhi jātirūpa’’nti. Kammasamuṭṭhānassapi rogassa visabhāgapaccayasamuppanno dhātukkhobho āsannakāraṇaṃ , pageva itarassa. So atthato rūpadhammānaṃ pākāvatthā ṭhitibhaṅgakkhaṇesu eva siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘jaratāaniccatādīhi rogarūpaṃ gahita’’nti.
699-704 色法由这些生起、产生,所以这些就是色法的生起因。那么这些是什么呢?回答说:时节、心、食、业。巴利
699-704. Rūpāni samuṭṭhahanti jāyanti etehīti rūpasamuṭṭhānāni. Kāni pana tānīti āha ‘‘utucittāhārakammānī’’ti.
在这里要加入“iti”这个词,意思是:业、时节、心和食,这些是色的因。“色的因”意思是色的生起因缘。因此说“正是由这些”等等。它们每一种都只有一种生起,所以叫“具单一生起”。问:难道不是从单一的缘,所生之法就不能生起吗?答:确实不能。这里的意思是,在诸生色因缘之中,从一种缘生起。八根,就是眼等五根、男女二根和命根,共八根。依身表和语表而有二种表色。巴利
Āhāro rūpahetuyoti ettha iti-saddo pakkhipitabbo, kammaṃ, utu ca cittañca āhāroti ime rūpahetuyoti. Rūpahetuyoti ca rūpassa janakapaccayāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘etehevā’’tiādi. Ekamekaṃyeva samuṭṭhānaṃ etesanti ekasamuṭṭhānā. Nanu ekato eva paccayato paccayuppannassa uppatti natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, rūpajanakapaccayesu ekatoti ayamettha abhisandhi. Aṭṭhindriyānīti cakkhādīni pañca, itthipurisindriyadvayaṃ, jīvitañcāti aṭṭhindriyāni. Kāyavacīviññattivasena viññattidvayaṃ.
“由两种”是指:有的由心,有的由时节,这样就是两种。因为同一个东西在同一刹那不可能有两个缘。其余各类也是这样。“由时节、食……所作”:是说每一种都由时节、食、心三者所作。“四大种”:就是四大元素。因为它们以无有情、无灵魂的意义而被称为“界”。由业等四种而生起,所以叫“四种生”。“二种”:就是老性与无常性。巴利
Dvīhīti koci cittena, koci utunā cāti evaṃ dvīhi. Na hi ekasseva dve ekakkhaṇe paccayā honti. Evaṃ sesesupi. Utuāhāra…pe… katanti ekekaṃ utunā, āhārena, cittena cāti tīhi kataṃ. Catasso cāpi dhātuyoti cattāri mahābhūtāni. Tāni hi nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena dhātūti vuccanti. Kammādīhi catūhi bhavantīti catubbhavā. Dveti jaratā aniccatā.
705-6 现在,为了说明即使把各种混合生起的色法合在一起计算,也要按照它们各自的缘来限定数量,所以说了“由业”等这段话。其中,八根、心所依处、纯八法聚、相续、增长、虚空,这二十种是业所生。两种表色、声音、轻快性等三种、纯八法聚等十一种,这十七种由心生起,意思是心所生。声音、轻快性等三种、纯八法聚等十一种,这十五种由时节生起。轻快性等三种、纯八法聚等十一种,这十四种由食生起。再加上老性和无常性,总共是六十八种,这就是这里的关联。巴利
705-6. Idāni missakasamuṭṭhānānipi gahetvā taṃtaṃpaccayajātānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kammenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhindriyāni vatthu suddhaṭṭhakaṃ santatyūpacayākāsāti vīsati kammajā. Viññattidvayaṃ saddo lahutādittayaṃ suddhaṭṭhakādayo ekādasāti sattarasa cetasā jāyare, cittajāti attho. Saddo lahutādittayaṃ suddhaṭṭhakādayo ekādasāti dasapañceva pannarasa utunā jāyare. Lahutādittayaṃ suddhaṭṭhakādayo ekādasāti cuddasa āhārato. Jaratāaniccatāhi te aṭṭhasaṭṭhi ca hontevāti sambandho.
707-8 说了“老……等生起”之后,为了进一步说明其中的道理,又说“已生的”等等。其中,已生者的成熟坏灭性:老性是已生之法的成熟性,无常性则是坏灭性,这就是其含义。这里说的是:老性和无常性属于已经生起的法,而不属于正在生起的法。如果它们属于正在生起的法,那么把它们也说成“正在生起”就说得通了。然而,对于已生之法,它们是在生起之后才存在的,所以可以说它们不生起。如果有人反驳说:“即使它们也有已生的状态,那又有什么矛盾?”为了破除他这种错误的执取,就说“会生起”等等。就算它们也有成熟和坏灭,那又有什么矛盾?于是说“不”等等。成熟并不完全成熟,这就是文句的连接,由此表明不坏灭;因为已成熟的事物,其坏灭是决定的。或者说,坏灭并不坏灭,这里也提到了成熟的状态;因为未成熟的事物不会坏灭,否则就会导致生与灭没有差别的过失。“没有”:就是说成熟与坏灭之法的烹熟、坏灭是不存在的。这是把前面所说的意思总结起来讲。巴利
707-8. ‘‘Jaratā…pe… samuṭṭhitā’’ti vatvā puna tattha kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘jātassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jātassa pākabhedattāti jaratāya jātadhammassa pākattā, aniccatāya ca bhedattāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – jaratāaniccatā nāma uppannadhammassa honti, no uppajjamānassa. Yadi hi uppajjamānassa siyuṃ, tadā tāsampi jāyamānattapariyāyo yujjeyya. Uppannadhammassa pana jātito paraṃ imāsaṃ sambhavato na jāyantīti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Yadi pana koci tesampi jātabhāve ko virodhoti paṭipajjeyya, tassa taṃ duggāhaṃ vidhamento āha ‘‘jāyeyyu’’ntiādi. Hontu nāma tesampi pākabhedā, tadāpi ko virodhoti āha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Pāko na paripaccatīti sambandho, etena na bhijjatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Pakkassa hi bhaṅgo niyato. Bhedo vā na ca bhijjatīti etthāpi pākabhāvopi vuttova. Na hi apakkaṃ bhijjatīti, aññathā uppādabhaṅgānaṃ anaññattappasaṅgato. Natthi tanti pākabhedānaṃ paccanaṃ bhijjanaṃ natthīti vuttamevatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā āha.
说到这里,到底说明了什么呢?如果老性和无常性是由某种缘而产生的,那么对于已经生起的事物,就应该有老和坏灭;这样一来,它们的老性和无常性也应该存在。可是这些根本找不到。为什么呢?因为老性不是靠另一个老而变老或坏灭的,坏灭也不是靠另一个坏灭而坏灭或变老的。否则的话,那个老也会靠另一个老和坏灭而变老、坏灭,那个坏灭也会靠另一个老、另一个坏灭而变老、坏灭,这样就会陷入无穷无尽的过失。这就是上面所说的意思。巴利
Ettāvatā ca kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yadi jaratāaniccatā kenaci paccayena jāyeyyuṃ, tadā uppannassa nāma jarāya, bhaṅgena ca bhavitabbanti tesaṃ jaratāaniccatāpi siyuṃ, na ca panetā upalabbhanti. Kasmā? Yasmā na jaratā aññajarāya jīrati, bhijjati vā, na ca bhaṅgo aññena bhaṅgena bhijjati, jīrati vā, itarathā sāpi jarā aparāya jarāya, bhaṅgena ca jīrati, bhijjati, so ca bhaṅgo aññāya jarāya, aññena bhaṅgena jīrati, bhijjatīti anavaṭṭhānappasaṅgatoti vuttaṃ hoti.
709-10 “已生者”等是总结语。或者,是为了回应进一步可能提出的责难而安立结论。“可能在某些地方有”等,是对他宗观点的审察。此处,即在这个“老性与无常性二者不成熟、不被坏灭”的论题中。“色的积集”中的“iti”是“等”的意思,因此意思是说,通过“色的积集、色的相续”这样的说法。同样地,应当联系“令熟者成熟,令坏者坏灭”来理解。然而这里的意图是:就像在解说业等所生色法时,通过“什么是所取色?眼处……乃至……身处、女根、男根、命根,或者其他由业所生的色,色处……乃至……触处、空界、色的积集、色的相续、段食”等,已经说明了积集与相续,因此表明“生”是生起的,即使没有后来的生。同样地,即使没有后来的老与坏灭,老去与坏灭也应当被承认。否则,生的坏灭也会落入同样的情形。巴利
709-10.‘‘Jātassā’’tiādi nigamanaṃ. Atha vā uttari vattabbacodanāya phalaṭhapanaṃ. ‘‘Siyā katthacī’’tiādi paramatāsaṅkanaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘jaratāaniccatādvayaṃ na paccati, na bhijjati vā’’ti adhikāre. Rūpassūpacayotīti iti-saddo ādiattho, tena ‘‘rūpassa upacayo santatī’’ti vacanenāti attho. Evaṃ pākopi paccatu, bhedopi paribhijjatūti sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā kammādīhi uppajjanakarūpaniddese ‘‘katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ upādinnaṃ? Cakkhāyatanaṃ…pe… kāyāyatanaṃ itthindriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi atthi rūpaṃ kammassa katattā rūpāyatanaṃ…pe… phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ ākāsadhātu rūpassa upacayo rūpassa santati kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 652) upacayasantatīnaṃ niddiṭṭhattā jāti jāyatīti dīpitaṃ hoti tassā aparajātiyā abhāvepi. Evaṃ jarābhaṅgānaṃ aparajarābhaṅgābhāvepi jīraṇaṃ, bhijjanañca sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, itarathā jātiyāpi bhedanā tadavatthāyevāti.
711 “并非”等语,是为了驳斥对所设想的胜义的执取。如果“它生起”不可了知,那为什么在解说中还要说它呢?所以接着说了“正在生起者”等话。这里的意思是:即使生并不具有正在生起性,但由于正在生起的诸法确实有现起的状况,所以许有“其为彼缘”的世俗言说,解说就是依据这个而说的,并不是从胜义上有正在生起性。因为对正在生起者来说,仅仅现起本身就是“生”,所以这不过是用一个尚未成立的东西去成立另一个尚未成立的东西。巴利
711.‘‘Nacevā’’tiādi yathāsaṅkitaparamatassa paṭikkhipanaṃ. Yadi jāyatīti na viññātabbaṃ, evañca sati niddese kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘jāyamānassā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – asatipi jātiyā jāyamānatte jāyamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinibbattibhāvato tassā tappaccayabhāvavohāro anumatoti tattha vuttā, na pana paramatthato jāyamānattā. Jāyamānassa hi abhinibbattimattaṃ jāti, tasmā asiddhena asiddhasādhanametanti.
712-7 对于“在那里”等语,他又一次对胜义提出疑问并加以否定。在这里,对于那些法,其“生”确实获得了“以彼为缘的称谓”以及“现起的共许”——这就是句子的关联。“如此”的意思是:就像确实获得那样。因为“yaṃ taṃ”这两个词表示不可分离的关联。“这些法的缘属于它”,所以叫“以彼为缘”;它的状态就是“以彼为缘性”;以彼为缘性而施设的称谓就是“以彼为缘的称谓”,意思是业缘状态等的称谓。“现起的共许”是指“现起、出生”这样依现起而施设的共许。“业等所生”是指由业等四种缘共同生起。能生的诸缘在其作用刹那生起时并不存在——这是句子的关联。不过这里的意思是:那些能生色法的缘,它们对产生色法的作用从不间断,那个以缘为特征的作用刹那,当诸法正在生起时,是作为它们的变化状态而被获得的;针对所教化的个人,从缘的角度认可了“生”的已生性,因为在此之前和之后都不可得。这样做了之后,才说“然而,生是可以获得的”。但老与坏灭在缘的作用刹那之后,于住位和坏灭刹那中都可获得,所以不能这样认可;而“生”却可以获得那种称谓,这就是意图所在。“以彼为缘的称谓”等两颂是作为总结而说的。巴利
712-7.‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā punapi paramatāsaṅkaṃ katvā paṭikkhipati. Tattha yesaṃ dhammānaṃ yā jāti, sā tappaccayattavohāraṃ, abhinibbattisammutiñca labhatevāti sambandho. Tathāti yathā labhateva, tathā. Yaṃtaṃ-saddā hi abyabhicāritasambandhā. Tesaṃ dhammānaṃ paccayā etissāti tappaccayā, tassā bhāvo tappaccayattaṃ, tappaccayattena pavatto vohāro tappaccayattavohāro, taṃ kammapaccayabhāvādivohāranti attho. Abhinibbattisammutinti abhinibbattati jāyatīti evaṃ abhinibbattivasena pavattasammutiṃ. Kammādisambhavanti kammādicatupaccayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Janakānaṃ paccayānaṃ ānubhāvakkhaṇuppāde abhāvatoti sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha attho – ye te rūpānaṃ janakapaccayā, tesaṃ taduppādanaṃ pati anuparatabyāpārānaṃ yo so paccayūpalakkhaṇiyo kiccānubhāvakkhaṇo, tadā jāyamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ vikārabhāvena labbhamānataṃ sandhāya vineyyapuggalavasena jātiyā paccayato jātattaṃ anuññātaṃ tato pure , pacchā ca anupalabbhamānattā, evañca katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘jātiyā pana labbhatī’’ti. Jarābhaṅgānaṃ pana paccayānubhāvakkhaṇato uttari ṭhitibhaṅgakkhaṇesu labbhamānattā na evaṃ anuññātuṃ sakkāti, jātiyā pana labbhati so vohāroti adhippāyo. Tappaccayattavohārantiādigāthādvayaṃ nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
718-9 那么,为什么要这样挠喉咙呢?世尊难道不是在经里说过“比丘们,老死是无常的、有为的、缘生的”吗?所以,如果有人这样说:“老性和无常性并不是由任何缘所生起的”,为了揭示并驳斥他的这种想法,才说了“无常”等话。为什么不该这样说呢?回答说:“因为那是方便说。”为了说明这正是方便说,才说了“无常的”等话。用“如是”这个词,就把“有为的”也包含进来了。巴利
718-9. Atha kiṃ imāya gīvākaṇḍūyāya, nanu vuttaṃ bhagavatā suttante ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppanna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.20), tasmā kathametaṃ vuccati, jaratā aniccatā ceva na kehici samuṭṭhitāti yo vadeyya, tassa vitakkaṃ dassetvā paṭikkhipituṃ ‘‘anicca’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kasmā na vattabbanti āha ‘‘sā hi pariyāyadesanā’’ti. Pariyāyadesanattameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aniccāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā-saddena ‘‘saṅkhatāna’’nti saṅgaṇhāti.
720-3 “无常与有为”这个“与”字,包含了“缘生的”意思。这里的意思是:因为老死属于无常、有为的诸法,所以那些法存在时它才存在,那些法不存在时它就不存在。因为未生起的东西不会成熟,也不会坏灭,所以针对“以生为缘”这一点,经中是按方便说才说“老死是有为的、缘生的,因此也是无常的”。就像表色等,虽然按非方便说并不是心所生的,但因为它们是心所生色的变异,所以说是心所生。而“如表色等”应当理解为只是举例,因为轻快性等也被认可为心所生等,只是按方便说才这样讲。按非方便说,只有十八种完成色是由业等所生起的。“三者”是指生、老、坏灭这三种相色。巴利
720-3.Aniccaṃsaṅkhatañcāti ca-saddena ‘‘paṭiccasamuppanna’’nti saṅgaṇhāti. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – aniccasaṅkhatadhammānaṃ jarāmaraṇattā tesu santesu hoti, asantesu na hoti. Na hi ajātaṃ paripaccati, bhijjati vā, tasmā taṃ jātipaccayataṃ sandhāya ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ, tatoyeva ca anicca’’nti pariyāyena sutte āgataṃ. Yathā viññattiādīnaṃ nippariyāyato cittasamuṭṭhānatābhāvepi cittajānaṃ vikārattā cittasamuṭṭhānabhāvoti. Viññattiyo viyāti ca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ lahutādīnampi cittajādibhāvassa pariyāyeneva icchitattā. Nippariyāyena aṭṭhāraseva nipphannarūpāni kammādisamuṭṭhānānīti. Tayanti jātijarābhaṅgasaṅkhātānaṃ lakkhaṇarūpattayaṃ.
像空中莲花一样,意思是说就像虚空中的花。正如虚空中的花因为完全不曾生起所以不存在,这个法也同样不存在,这就是它的意思。或者说像常与无为一样,意思是说正如无为的涅槃因为不被任何事物所造作而恒常、稳固,这个法也同样因为不被任何事物所造作而恒常、永恒。然而并非两者兼有,意思是说这个法既不像空中莲花那样完全不存在,也不像涅槃那样是无为的。依止而系属运转,是说正在生起、正在成熟、正在坏灭的诸法,以生等为其存在方式,系属于生起等所依而运转。为了说明这依止而系属运转的性质,才说了地等诸界存在时等话。这里简要的意思是:当地等所依存在时,生等三相就显现,所以并非不存在;而当它们不存在时,三相就不显现,所以并非恒常。应当知道,世尊正是为了否定这两种执著,才说了生的四种情况,以及老死等无常的同义表述。巴利
Khaṃpupphaṃvāti ākāsakusumaṃ viya. Yathā ākāsakusumaṃ sabbaso ajātattā natthi, evamidampi natthīti attho. Niccaṃ vāsaṅkhataṃ viyāti yathā asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ kenaci asaṅkhatattā niccaṃ dhuvaṃ, evamidampi kenaci asaṅkhatattā niccaṃ sassataṃ vāti attho. Nobhayaṃ panidanti idaṃ pana ubhayampi khaṃpupphaṃ viya no natthi, na ca nibbānaṃ viya asaṅkhataṃ vāti attho. Nissayāyattavuttitoti jāyamānaparipaccamānabhijjamānānaṃ jātiādimattabhāvena jāyamānādinissayapaṭibaddhavuttittā. Tameva nissayāyattavuttitaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘bhāve pathaviyādīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – pathavīādīnaṃ nissayānaṃ bhāve jātiādittayaṃ paññāyati, tasmā no natthi, yasmā ca tesaṃ abhāve na paññāyati, tasmā na niccanti imameva ca abhinivesaṃ nisedhetuṃ bhagavatā jātiyā catujattaṃ, jarāmaraṇassa ca aniccādipariyāyo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
724-5 “已完成的”是指:因为超越了“色的分界、色的变化、色的相”等分界等状态,依其自身的坚硬等性质而被区分和把握;或者,因为确实是由业等缘直接完成的,所以叫“已完成的”。与此相反的,就是“未完成的”。巴利
724-5.Nipphannāni nāmāti ‘‘rūpassa paricchedo, rūpassa vikāro, rūpassa lakkhaṇa’’ntiādinā paricchedādibhāvaṃ atikkamitvā attano kakkhaḷattādinā sabhāvena paricchijja gahetabbattā, apariyāyeneva kammādipaccayehi nipphannattā vā nipphannāni nāma. Tabbiparītato anipphannā.
听人说到“其余的不是完成色”之后,另一方想引出对方不想要的结论,就说:“如果它们存在……”等等。接着又用“正是那些……”等话加以否定。身体的变化叫身表,语言的变化叫语表,孔洞、缝隙叫空界,轻快状态叫轻快性,柔软状态叫柔软性,适业状态叫适业性,生起叫积集,转起叫相续,衰老的样子叫老性,从有变成没有的样子叫无常性。这样一来,因为这些正是那十八种完成色的变化状态,所以它们既是完成色,也是有为的。而且,既然它们是那些色的变化,又怎么能叫无为呢?将“既是完成色,也是有为的”连属起来之后,注释师们解释其中的意思:如果作为非完成色所依靠的完成色是有为的,那么作为它们变化的非完成色,怎么能叫无为呢?按照他们的意图,“既是完成色”这句话里的va音,应当理解为增音而成的。巴利
Sesakā anipphannāti sutvā paro aniṭṭhaṃ āpādento āha ‘‘yadi hontī’’tiādi. ‘‘Tesamevā’’tiādinā pana taṃ paṭikkhipati. Kāyavikāro kāyaviññatti nāma, vacīvikāro vacīviññatti nāma, chiddaṃ vivaraṃ ākāsadhātu nāma, lahubhāvo lahutā nāma, mudubhāvo mudutā nāma , kammaññabhāvo kammaññatā nāma, nibbatti upacayo nāma, pavatti santati nāma, jīraṇākāro jaratā nāma, hutvā abhāvākāro aniccatā nāmāti evaṃ tesaṃyeva aṭṭhārasannaṃ nipphannarūpānaṃ vikārabhūtattā nipphannā ceva saṅkhatā ca, tesaṃyeva ca rūpānaṃ vikārattā te asaṅkhatā nāma kathaṃ bhaveyyuṃ, nipphannā ceva saṅkhatāti sambandhaṃ katvā yadi anipphannarūpānaṃ nissayabhūtā nipphannarūpā saṅkhatā, tesaṃ pana vikārabhūtā kathaṃ asaṅkhatā nāma hontīti atthaṃ vaṇṇenti. Tesaṃ adhippāyena nipphannā cevāti va-kāro āgamasiddhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
726-7 “女性性……等等……已作解说”这一句,是确立结论。“如果这样的话”等语,是对方的诘难。“然而,另一者”等语,是回应。其中,所谓“眼净色与身净色成为单一性”,意思是:如果眼净色中有身净色的性质,身净色中有眼净色的性质,那么前者就能显现触,后者就能显现色,这样一来眼净色与身净色就会变成一体。这只是一种举例说明而已。因为按照同样的道理,耳净色与身净色等等也都会变成单一性。巴利
726-7.Itthibhāvo…pe… vaṇṇitāti phalaṭhapanaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ sante’’tiādi codanā. ‘‘Aññaṃ panā’’tiādi parihāro. Tattha cakkhukāyapasādānaṃ, ekattaṃ upapajjatīti cakkhupasāde kāyapasādabhāvassa, kāyapasāde cakkhupasādabhāvassa sabbhāvato purimassa phoṭṭhabbāvabhāsanaṃ, itarassa ca rūpāvabhāsanaṃ hotīti cakkhukāyapasādānaṃ ekībhāvo bhaveyyāti attho. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ. Sotakāyapasādādīnampi hi vuttanayena ekattaṃyevāti.
728-30 “然而,一者在另一者中并不存在”——这是说,除了以彼此不可分离的方式生起之外,从究竟真实来说,一种色并不存在于另一种色中,因为它们属于不同的色聚,所依也不同。眼净色依于以欲见之思为因的业所生的大种,身净色依于以欲触之思为因的业所生的大种。“不混杂”就是不相杂乱。如果这样的话,那是不是一切处都没有身处的色等呢?从究竟真实来说,那也不存在。因为把它们分离开之后,根本无法安立它们之间的差别。为了说明这一点,才说了“以彼此不相离的方式”等话。“以彼此……而转起”:就是以彼此在相续上不可分离、不相混杂的方式而转起。但这里的意思并不是“以不可分离色为方式”。因为不能宣说同一色聚中的眼净色和身净色,其不可分离色有处所的差别。就像色与味等,因为无法区分而说它们彼此遍满,但从究竟真实来说,色中并没有味。如果有的话,那么取色的时候就应该也取到味了。同样,身处等从究竟真实来说也并非存在于一切处,任何懂得时机的人都不能说“这个在这里,这个在那里”,作出这样的处所区分。“因此有身净色”中的“iti”这个词是“因此”的意思,所以他说“因此”。“如此所说”就是于一切处如此所说。巴利
728-30.Aññaṃ pana aññasmiṃ na catthīti ṭhapetvā aññamaññāvinibbhogavasena pavattiṃ aññaṃ rūpaṃ aññasmiṃ rūpe paramatthato nevatthi bhinnanissayabhāvena kalāpantaragatattā. Cakkhupasādo hi daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammasamuṭṭhitabhūtanissito, kāyapasādo phusitukāmatānidānakammajabhūtanissito. Asaṅkaranti asaṃkiṇṇaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, na sabbattha kāyāyatanādikanti? Tampi natthi paramatthato. Vinibbhujitvā hi nesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ paññāpetuṃ na sakkā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aññamaññāvinibbhogavasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aññamaññā…pe… pavattitoti aññamaññaṃ santānato avinibbhujjanavasena avisaṃsaṭṭhavasena pavattanato. Avinibbhogarūpavasenāti pana attho na hoti. Na hi cakkhukāyapasādānaṃ ekakalāpagataavinibbhogarūpā ṭhānantaraṃ vattuṃ sakkāti . Yathā rūparasādīnaṃ vivecetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya aññamaññabyāpitā vuccati, na ca paramatthato rūpe raso atthi. Yadi siyā, rūpaggahaṇeneva rasaggahaṇaṃ gaccheyya. Evaṃ kāyāyatanādīnampi paramatthato na sabbattha atthitā, ‘‘idaṃ ettha, idaṃ etthā’’ti ṭhānantaraṃ pana samayaññunā kenaci na sakkā vattunti. Atthi kāyapasādotīti itisaddo ‘‘tasmā’’ti imassa atthe. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’ti. Evamudīritanti sabbaṭṭhānikanti evamudīritaṃ.
731-2 “依特征等”也是指依照前面所说的特征、作用、现起、近因来说的。“诸旗之影……已达到”:意思是说,由青等五种颜色的线织成的五色旗,每一面旗各自以一种颜色为特征,这些旗的影子达到了、获得了对它们的譬喻状态、譬喻性。有些人则说:“这些法的影就是譬喻,所以叫‘影譬喻’;影譬喻的状态就是‘影譬喻性’,这些法已经达到了这个状态。”不过,这大概是他们以为:这里“已达到影譬喻性”只是依照多财释才用了短音。其实应当看作是为了偈颂的韵律结构才用短音。因为在“第四颂”等地方,论师连格位词尾都省略了来展示,可见他在这种地方并不特别在意文字表达。至于那些不愿意把下面的“他们”和上面的“诸法”联系起来的人,他们说的“已得种种性”,在这里即使不愿意也必须联系起来。因为“已得种种性”不可能不期待“他们”。即使他们假设这里读作“已得种种性”,但在典籍中看不到这种读法,只是靠假设的读法来让自己满意罢了。这里的意旨是这样的:就像五色旗被集中竖立起来时,它们的影子虽然看起来连成一片,但彼此并不混杂;同样,这些一切处所造色虽然看起来连成一片,但从特征上说,彼此体性各别,绝不混杂。因为即使在同一聚当中,从特征上说体性也各别,何况在不同聚当中呢?巴利
731-2.Lakkhaṇādivasenāpīti yathāvuttalakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasenāpi. Dhajānaṃ…pe… gatāti pañcavaṇṇānaṃ nīlādipañcavaṇṇasuttamayānaṃ ekamekassa vā ekekavaṇṇavasena dhajānaṃ chāyā tesaṃ upamataṃ upamābhāvaṃ gatā sampattāti attho. Keci pana ‘‘chāyā upamā etesanti chāyāupamā, chāyāupamānaṃ bhāvo chāyāupamatā, taṃ gatā ete dhammā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ pana tehi ‘‘chāyāupamataṃ gatā’’ti ettha bahubbīhivaseneva rassattanti maññamānehi vuttaṃ bhaveyya. Gāthābandhatthaṃ pana rassattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Catutthadū’’tiādīsu hi vibhattilopampi katvā dassento ācariyo na īdisesu ṭhānesu byañjane ādaraṃ janeti. Yaṃ pana ‘‘tesa’’nti heṭṭhāpadaṃ, ‘‘dhammāna’’nti uparipadaṃ vā sambandhituṃ anicchantehi vuccati tattha ‘‘nānattaṃ samupāgata’’nti. Taṃ ettha akāmāpi sambandhitabbameva. Na hi nānattaṃ samupāgataṃ tesanti nāpekkhatīti. Athāpi tattha ‘‘nānattaṃ samupāgatā’’ti pāṭhaṃ parikappeyyuṃ, hotu tāva potthakesu adissamānampi pāṭhaṃ parikappetvā tesaṃ tuṭṭhi. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā pañcavaṇṇānaṃ dhajānaṃ ekato katvā ussāpitānaṃ kiñcāpi chāyā ekābaddhā viya hoti, aññamaññaṃ pana asammissāva, evameva ime sabbaṭṭhānikarūpā kiñcāpi ekābaddhā viya honti, lakkhaṇato pana aññamaññaṃ bhinnasabhāvā asammissāyeva. Ekakalāpaṭṭhāpi hi lakkhaṇato bhinnasabhāvā, kiṃ pana nānākalāpaṭṭhāti.
733 733. 被自己的诸缘系缚于世间,或者已被了知,所以叫世间;它的状态就是世间性。使相应的一堆法由此而生起、停留,所以叫因;从根本义上说,就是能起帮助作用的贪等和无贪等;不是这样的因,就叫非因。依靠自己的诸缘而被造作、被构造,所以叫有为。从有顶或从种姓流出,所以叫漏;与漏同在,所以叫有漏,意思是能被漏所缘取。被缘所系属而转起,也就是依各自的缘而转起,所以说是有缘。这只是一个例子。同样,由于是欲界、是无因、与因不相应、是结缚、是系缚、是取着、是暴流、是轭、是盖、是杂染、是被执取、是非心所、与心不相应、不是色界、不是无色界、不是出世间、不导向出离、是无常等等理由,也可说为一类。巴利
733. Attano paccayehi loke niyuttaṃ, viditanti vā lokikaṃ, tassa bhāvo lokikattaṃ. Hinoti patiṭṭhahati sampayuttadhammarāsi etenāti hetu, mūlaṭṭhena upakārako lobhādiko ca alobhādiko ca, tādiso hetu na hotīti nahetu. Attano paccayehi saṅkhataṃ abhisaṅkhatanti saṅkhataṃ. Ābhavaggā, āgotrabhu vā savantīti āsavā, saha āsavehīti sāsavaṃ, āsavehi ālambitabbanti attho. Paccayāyattavuttitoti attano attano paccayādhīnappavattitāya sappaccayattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nidassanamattametaṃ. Kāmāvacarattā ahetukattā hetuvippayuttattā saṃyojaniyattā ganthaniyattā upādāniyattā oghaniyattā yoganiyattā nīvaraṇiyattā saṃkilesikattā parāmaṭṭhattā acetasikattā cittavippayuttattā na rūpāvacarattā na arūpāvacarattā na apariyāpannattā aniyyānikattā aniccattāti evamādināpi kāraṇena ekavidhamevāti.
734-8 像这样用“一类”的方式说明之后,现在为了用“等”这个字来说明其中所含的“二类”等方式,就以“内与外”等开始,展开内二等法。其中,在内二法里,先说“我慢安立在这里”,这就是自我,是个体存在;因为它是缘着、针对这个自我而转起的,所以叫“内”,也就是系属于根的诸法;存在于这些法中,或存在于自我中,就是“内”。虽然还有其他内生的法,但依照惯用语,只有眼等才被称为“内”。或者,就像有人说“如果我们不存在,你就会像木片柴薪一样”,因为它们对自体有特别大的帮助,所以它们特别得到“内”这个名称。根与非根:以增上义为根,其余因为没有这个义,所以是非根。其中应当知道,眼等五根在眼识等中有增上作用,因为眼识等随顺它们敏锐、迟钝等状态;男女二根是男女相等等的因;命根则护持俱生色。粗与细:因为是有境与有境者的关系,通过撞击而被执取,所以是粗;与此相反的是细。所执受:就是被业所执取。因为业所生者,就像被那个业执取为“这是我的果”一样。巴利
734-8. Evaṃ ekavidhanayaṃ dassetvā idāni ādi-saddena saṅgahitaduvidhatādinayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ajjhattikabahiddhā’’tiādinā ajjhattikadukādayo āraddhā. Tattha ajjhattikaduke tāva āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, attabhāvo, taṃ attānaṃ adhikicca uddissa pavattattā ajjhattā, indriyabaddhadhammā, tesu bhavāni, attani vā bhavāni ajjhattikāni. Kāmaṃ aññepi ajjhattasambhūtā atthi, ruḷhīvasena pana cakkhādīneva ‘‘ajjhattikānī’’ti vuccanti. Atha vā ‘‘yadi mayaṃ na homa, tvaṃ kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamo bhavissasī’’ti vadantā viya attabhāvassa sātisayaṃ upakārakānīti tāneva visesato ajjhattikanāmaṃ labhanti. Indriyānindriyāti ādhipaccaṭṭhena indriyāni, sesaṃ tadabhāvato anindriyaṃ. Tattha cakkhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīsu adhipateyyaṃ tesaṃ paṭumandabhāvādianuvattanato, itthindriyapurisindriyadvayassa itthiliṅgādihetubhāve, jīvitindriyassa ca sahajarūpānupālaneti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visayavisayībhāvato ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbattā oḷārikaṃ, tabbiparītattā sukhumaṃ. Upādinnanti kammunā gahitaṃ. Kammanibbattañhi ‘‘mametaṃ phala’’nti tena kammunā gahitaṃ viya hoti.
十一……有对:因为不是眼识所能认知的,也没有可见性,所以是不可见;但因为彼此撞击,所以是有对;把这两者都排除,就是不可见无对。从业而生:这里,完全由业所生的有八根和所依处,共九种色。而在十一种四等起当中,由业所生的也有十一种色,这样共二十种色,因为是从业生起的,所以是业生。因为无论已生、正生、将来生,这一切都称为业生,就像牛乳一样。从业之外的是非业,不是从业所生的是非业生,这里的“非”字用在别的意义上。所以说从其他缘而生。也就是从业以外的其他缘——时节、心、食——所生。心唯生等,可以按照前面所说的方式配合,所以没有另外显示。巴利
Ekādasa…pe… sappaṭighanti cakkhuviññāṇāviññeyyattā sanidassanattābhāvato anidassanaṃ, aññamaññaṃ patanavasena pana paṭighasabbhāvato sappaṭighaṃ, ubhayapaṭikkhepena anidassanaappaṭighaṃ. Kammato jātanti ettha yaṃ ekantato kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhindriyāni, vatthu cāti navavidhaṃ rūpaṃ. Yañca ekādasavidhe catusamuṭṭhāne kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ ekādasavidhameva rūpanti evaṃ vīsatividhampi kammato uppajjanato kammajaṃ. Yañhi jātaṃ, yañca jāyati, yañca jāyissati, taṃ sabbampi ‘‘kammaja’’nti vuccati yathā ‘‘duddha’’nti. Kammato aññaṃ akammaṃ, akammato jātaṃ akammajaṃ. Aññatthe hi ayaṃ a-kāro. Tenāha ‘‘tadaññapaccayājāta’’nti. Kammato aññapaccayato jātaṃ, utucittāhārajanti attho. Cittajattikādīni vuttānusārena yojetuṃ sakkāti na dassitāni.
在“所见”这一组四类里,应当被见到的,就叫“所见”。无论是已经看见过的色处、将来会看见的色处、正在看见的色处,还是可能看见的色处,这一切都称为“所见”,因为它们都没有超出这种性质,就像说“可爱的”一样。这个道理也适用于“所闻”等。“所见”就是色处,因为它是眼识所识知的。“所闻”就是声处,因为它是耳识所识知的。“所觉”就是香处、味处、触处这三处,因为要通过觉知、接触来把握,或者因为它们与净色相关联;因为确实说它们是取至境的所缘。“所知”就是其余的法处,因为它们只能由意识来识知。巴利
Diṭṭhacatukke daṭṭhabbanti diṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ adakkhi, yañca dakkhissati, yañca dakkhati, yañca passeyya, taṃ sabbaṃ diṭṭhaṃ nāma taṃsabhāvānativattanato yathā ‘‘iṭṭha’’nti. Esa nayo sutādīsupi. Diṭṭhaṃ nāma rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyattā. Sutaṃ nāma saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇaviññeyyattā. Mutaṃ nāma gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanattayaṃ mutvā patvā gahetabbato , pasādena saha sambandhanato vā. Tathā hetaṃ sampattaggāhakavisayaṃ vuttaṃ. Viññātaṃ nāma avasesaṃ kevalaṃ manoviññāṇaviññeyyattā.
所依之四
既是门又是所依:对于依自身而起的眼识等,以及依其他缘而起的领受等,因为它们是生起的入口,所以是门;又因为它们是依自身者的依托处,所以是所依。只是门而不是所依:仅仅作为业门,所以只是门;因为不存在依它而生起的心,所以不是所依。只是所依而不是门:因为作为意界和意识界的依止处,所以只是所依;就像眼等对于依其他缘而生起的心,不是生起的门,所以不是门。其余二十一种色,按照前面所说的反过来,既不是门也不是所依。在第四个四法中:是指所依四法。第三句:是指“唯所依而非根”一句。巴利
Dvārañcevavatthu cāti attanissitānaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ, aññanissitānaṃ sampaṭicchanādīnañca pavattimukhabhāvato dvārañceva attanissitānaṃ ādhārabhāvato vatthu ca. Dvārameva hutvā na vatthūti kevalaṃ kammadvārabhāvato dvārameva, tannissitassa cittuppādassa abhāvato na vatthu. Vatthumeva hutvā na dvāranti manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayabhāvato vatthumeva, cakkhādayo viya saparanissitānaṃ pavattidvārābhāvato na dvāraṃ. Sesaṃ ekavīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ vuttavipariyāyato neva dvāraṃ na vatthu ca. Catutthacatukketi vatthucatukke. Tatiyapadanti ‘‘vatthumeva hutvā nevindriya’’nti padaṃ.
739-40 再说,“五种”是连接语。“四生”已经说明过了,因为只从四种生起。巴利
739-40. Puna pañcavidhanti sambandho. Catujanti pakāsitaṃ catūhiyeva samuṭṭhānato.
色处是眼识所认识的,因为它能被眼识执取,但并不是只靠眼识就能认识。因为它是通过转向等作用以及意门速行来认识的。这个道理也适用于耳识所认识的对象等。而意识所认识的对象,则只能由意识来认识。因为眼识等并不会在色等之外生起。巴利
Cakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ tena gahetabbato, na pana cakkhuviññāṇeneva viññeyyato. Tathā hetaṃ āvajjanādīhi ceva manodvārikajavanehi ca viññāyatīti. Esa nayo sotaviññeyyādīsupi. Manoviññāṇaviññeyyaṃ pana kevalaṃ manoviññāṇeneva viññātabbaṃ. Na hi rūpādito aññattha cakkhuviññāṇādīni pavattanti.
按六种所依和无所依的区分来说,就是六种所依与无所依的分别。意界所识的,是色等五法。巴利
Chavatthuavatthubhedatoti channaṃ vatthūnaṃ, avatthussa ca bhedato. Manodhātuviññeyyaṃ rūpādipañcakaṃ.
因为意处没有色法,而法处有一部分属于色法,所以说“从处的分类来看有十一种”。巴利
Manāyatanassa arūpattā, dhammāyatanassa ca ekadesato rūpattā āha ‘‘āyatanabhedato ekādasavidha’’nti.
743-5 无色界里没有色法的生起,无想有又属于色有,所以说“在欲有和色有二有中”。“排除地居天”是指把地居天排除在外,因为他们在生类划分上跟人相似。“前三种”指卵生、胎生、湿生。这三种在如前所说的分类中找不到,排除了它们,也就等于认可了最后一种化生。其中“地狱”也包括了近边地狱,因为即使在无间大地狱里,昆虫之类也是先以后来才长大的身体出生的;饥渴饿鬼因为一直受苦而没有贪欲,所以不入胎,因此那里没有卵生和胎生。有人说,因为子宫被火烧灼,胎儿无法在其中安住。又因为投生者要凭恶业之力承受大苦,所以必须有大身体,因此他们也没有湿生;还有人说,由于身体被火焰烧灼,出生时在湿润的花等地方无法和合生起,所以根本没有湿生。因此,他们只有化生,所以说“饥渴饿鬼”。那么,湿生和化生有什么区别呢?湿生最初是微小的身体,依附莲花胎等出生,然后渐渐长大;化生则在出生的地方就已经具有确定大小的身体,诸根肢体圆满显现,就像十六岁的少年一样。巴利
743-5. Arūpabhave rūpuppattiyā abhāvato, asaññībhavassa ca rūpabhavapariyāpannattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmarūpabhavadvaye’’ti. Bhummavajjesūti bhummadevānaṃ vajjanaṃ yonivibhāgaṃ patvā tesaṃ manussasadisattā. Purimā tissoti aṇḍajajalābujasaṃsedajayoniyo. Tā hi yathāvuttappabhedesu na labbhanti, tāsañca paṭikkhepena pacchimā opapātikayoni anuññātāti atthato āpannameva hotīti. Tattha nirayeti ussadānampi gahaṇato avīcimahāniraye kīṭapāṇakānampi sarīraṃ pacchā vaḍḍhanakaṃ hutvāva nibbattati, nijjhāmataṇhikapetānaṃ niccāturatāya kāmassa abhāvato gabbhaggahaṇaṃ na hoti, tasmā aṇḍajajalābujayoniyo tattha na santi, ādittattā kucchiyaṃ gabbhaṃ na patiṭṭhātīti keci. Nibbattamānānañca pāpakammānubhāvena mahādukkhassa pattabbatāya mahanteneva sarīrena bhavitabbanti saṃsedajayonipi tesaṃ na hoti, aggijālāya santappamānasarīrattā tesaṃ nibbattakāle allaṭṭhāne pupphādīsu sambhavābhāvato saṃsedajatā natthevātipi vadanti. Tena tesaṃ opapātikāva yonīti āha ‘‘nijjhāmataṇhike’’ti. Atha saṃsedajaopapātikayonīnaṃ ko visesoti? Saṃsedajo tāva khuddakasarīro hutvā padumagabbhādiṃ nissāya nibbatto kamena vaḍḍhati. Itaro pana yattha yattha nibbattati, tattha tattha paricchinnappamāṇasarīrova soḷasavassuddesiko viya paripuṇṇaṅgapaccaṅgo pāturahosi.
除了天趣和地狱趣之外,剩下的人、饿鬼、畜生这三趣,就叫“其余三趣”。在人当中,有些是卵生的,比如衮塔普塔双胞胎长老那样;有些是湿生的,比如生在莲花胎里的沸伽罗娑罗婆罗门等人;有些是化生的,比如庵婆婆利等人。至于那些除饥渴饿鬼以外的其余饿鬼,以及所有四足、有翼、长类等各类畜生,则全都属于四生。巴利
Sese gatittayeti ṭhapetvā devagatiṃ, nirayagatiñca avasesamanussapetatiracchānasaññite gatittaye. Manussesu hi keci aṇḍajāpi honti kuntaputtadvebhātikattherā viya, keci saṃsedajāpi honti padumagabbhe nibbattapokkharasātibrāhmaṇādayo viya, keci opapātikāpi honti ambapāligaṇikādayo viya. Nijjhāmataṇhikāvasesapetā pana sabbacatuppadapakkhijātidīghajātiādayo sabbepi tiracchānā ca catuyonikāvāti.
746-7 所谓“胎卧者”,就是躺在母胎里、住在母亲子宫中的人;因为他在色等诸法上还是以有情的方式存在,所以就是胎卧有情。这个胎卧有情的三十种色,是指身十法、性根十法、所依十法,也就是正好三十种业生色。因为那时候并没有心生色,结生心不能生起色法;也没有时节生色,因为先前生起的时节还不存在。时节要到达住位才能生起色法;也没有食生色,因为那时身体里还没有吞进食物。所以在结生那一刹那,只有业所生的这三十种色生起,它们被称为“羯罗蓝”。当这团色聚凝结时,就像用一根发丝挑起澄清的胡麻油,挂在发尖上的那一滴,清澈明净,如同澄清的油滴一样。正如所说——巴利
746-7. Gabbhe mātukucchiyaṃ setīti gabbhaseyyako, soyeva rūpādīsu sattatāya gabbhaseyyakasatto. Tassa gabbhaseyyakasattassa. Tiṃsa rūpānīti kāyabhāvavatthudasakavasena samatiṃsa kammajarūpāniyeva. Tadā hi neva cittajarūpamatthi paṭisandhicittassa rūpasamuṭṭhāpakattābhāvato, nāpi utujaṃ purimuppannautuno abhāvā. Utu hi ṭhānappattaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, na ca āhārajaṃ tasmiṃ kāye ajjhohaṭassa abhāvato, tasmā kammasamuṭṭhānāniyeva tiṃsa rūpāni paṭisandhikkhaṇe nibbattanti, yānī ‘‘kalalarūpa’’nti pavuccanti, paripiṇḍitāni ca tāni jātiuṇṇāya ekassa aṃsuno pasannatilatele pakkhipitvā uddhaṭassa paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumattāni acchāni vippasannāni pasannatelabindusamānāni honti. Yathāhu –
就像胡麻油的一滴,
像醍醐一样清澈无浊;
就像这样,与颜色相似的部分,
称为羯罗蓝。巴利
‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, Sappimaṇḍo anāvilo; Evaṃ vaṇṇapaṭibhāgaṃ, Kalalanti pavuccatī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 26);
“唯具性者”这个限定词表明:因为无性者没有“有性十法”,所以三十种色不可能生起。因此说“无性……中略……依身与所依”。有些人认为,“无性卧胎者”这一说法是为了表明无性化生者并非如此。但应当理解,前面已经说了具性者的卧胎者,为了排除他们,才说“无性卧胎有情”。前面用“卧胎”一词已经包含了卵生,这里另外单独说,是依照牛与牡牛理趣,并不是为了排除那些卵生者的无性有。否则,就和二十色的说法相矛盾。这里的无性有,应当从论说上下文来理解卵生的情形。因为“无性”一词已与“卧胎者”组成复合词,不能把它拿到这里来用。巴利
Sabhāvassevāti avadhāraṇena abhāvakassa bhāvadasakābhāvato tiṃsarūpānaṃ asambhavaṃ dīpeti. Tenāha ‘‘abhāva…pe… kāyavatthuvasena tū’’ti. Abhāvagabbhaseyyānanti iminā abhāvaopapātikānaṃ na evanti dassetīti keci. Pubbe sabhāvakagabbhaseyyakassa pana vatvā tato nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘abhāvagabbhaseyyakasattāna’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pubbe gabbhaseyyaka-ggahaṇena aṇḍajānampi gahaṇe idha visuṃ vacanaṃ gobalībaddañāyavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, na pana tesaṃ abhāvakabhāvanivattanatthanti. Itarathā hi vīsatirūpānaṃ vacanaṃ virujjhati. Abhāvakabhāvo panettha aṇḍajānaṃ pakaraṇato daṭṭhabbo. Na hi gabbhaseyyaka-saddena samāsabhūtaṃ abhāva-saddaṃ idha ānetuṃ sakkāti.
748 这里,“已取与未取”的意思是:在一个色聚中已取的色法,在另一个色聚中则算作未取。因此,纯粹八法聚、命根、身净色、心所依色——对于无性根者,在结生刹那有十一种色法;而对于有性根者,在男女二性中与其中一性相应时,就有十二种色法。在已说和将说的结生刹那诸色聚中,当以“未取之取”来把握色法时,应当知道也是同样的道理。巴利
748.Gahitāgahaṇenettha, ekādasa bhavanti teti ekasmiṃ kalāpe gahitarūpānaṃ aparakalāpe aggahaṇavasena suddhaṭṭhakaṃ, jīvitaṃ, kāyapasādo, vatthurūpanti abhāvakassa paṭisandhikkhaṇe ekādasa rūpāni bhavanti, sabhāvakassa pana dvīsu bhāvesu ekena saha dvādasa rūpāni honti. Eseva ca nayoti vuttesu, vakkhamānesu ca paṭisandhikkhaṇikakalāpesu aggahitaggahaṇena rūpaggahaṇe nayo eseva ñeyyo.
749 既然已经说过“在一切十法聚中”,那这些十法聚又该怎么认识呢?所以接着说“以命根等”。所谓纯八法聚,就是四大种以及依靠它们的色、香、味、食素,这是不与命根等混杂的纯八法聚。这八种色法,在某些情况下即使以不可分离的方式存在,也被称为不可分离色,从最低限度来说叫作一个色聚。不过阿阇梨护光长老说:“按完成色与非完成色来分,十种色法以不可分离的方式存在,就是一个色聚。”接着为了说明这个意思,又这样说:巴利
749. Nanu ca ‘‘sabbesu dasakesū’’ti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ pana te dasakā jānitabbāti āha ‘‘jīvitenā’’tiādi. Suddhakamaṭṭhakanti cattāri mahābhūtāni, tannissitā ca vaṇṇagandharasaojāti idaṃ jīvitādinā asammissaṃ suddhaṭṭhakaṃ. Imāniyeva hi aṭṭha katthaci avinibbhogavasenapi pavattito avinibbhogarūpāni avakaṃsato eko kalāpoti ca vuccati. Ācariyajotipālattherena pana ‘‘nipphannānipphannavasena dasa rūpāni avinibbhogavuttikāni eko kalāpo’’ti vatvā puna taṃsamatthanatthaṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ –
以不可分离的方式存在,具有四种被认知的特相;
或于彼等已完成色中,除去八种身相。巴利
‘‘Avinibbhogavuttīni, catujānekalakkhaṇā; Nipphannānaṭṭha vā tesu, hitvāna kāyalakkhaṇe’’ti.
750 所谓“身十法聚”,就是在这里以身为第十的法聚;或者也可以说,是以不共的身来标示的十法聚。眼十法聚等也是同样的道理。或者说,“已通达”即是“已了知”,即是“已宣说”的意思。巴利
750.Kāyadasakanti kāyo dasamo etthāti kāyadasakaṃ, asādhāraṇena vā kāyena lakkhitaṃ dasakaṃ kāyadasakaṃ. Esa nayo cakkhudasakādīsu. Pariyāpuṭaṃ ñātaṃ, kathitanti vā attho.
752-3 在欲界诸天中,不论结生还是转起,任何时候都能获得七十种色法,所以说“恒常具有七十种色法”。因为他们任何时候都不会是根残缺的,也不会是无性的。虽然笼统地说“人类中的化生有情”,但应当知道,劫初之人因为在结生刹那没有性根十法聚,所以他们有六十种色法。命根九法聚也只存在于化生和湿生的欲界有情的转起中,因为它与消化之火同时存在,并且依靠已吞咽的食物而生起。湿生者出生时也具足各种肢节,与化生者没有差别,所以没有单独列出他们。在《分别论》中也说:巴利
752-3. Kāmāvacaradevesu sabbakālaṃ paṭisandhipavattīsu sattatiyā rūpānaṃ labbhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘niccaṃ rūpāni sattatī’’ti. Na hi te kadācipi vikalindriyā, abhāvakā vā honti. ‘‘Manussesu opapātikasattāna’’nti avisesena vuttepi ādikappikānaṃ bhāvadasakassa paṭisandhikkhaṇe abhāvato tesaṃ saṭṭhi rūpānīti veditabbaṃ. Jīvitanavakampi opapātikānaṃ, saṃsedajānañca kāmāvacarasattānaṃ pavatteyeva hoti tassa pācakagginā sahavuttittā, tassa ca ajjhohaṭāhārasannissayena sambhavato. Saṃsedajānampi paripuṇṇaṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ nibbattanato opapātikehi viseso natthīti tesaṃ visuṃ aggahaṇaṃ. Vibhaṅgepi hi –
在欲界结生的那一刹那,有些众生会显现出十一个处,有些显现出十个处,有些显现出另外的十个处,有些显现出九个处,有些显现出七个处。巴利
‘‘Kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, kassaci dasāyatanāni, kassaci aparāni dasāyatanāni, kassaci navāyatanāni, kassaci sattāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1009) –
在这段解说里,只提到了“化生有情”等,只取了化生,没有取湿生。这是因为具足诸处的湿生者也被归入化生之中。正如注释书里所说:“湿生者因为具足诸处,所以被归入化生来说。”或者,为了显示以主要生类为代表的一切具足诸处的生类,才说“化生有情”。巴利
Imassa niddese ‘‘opapātikasattāna’’ntiādinā opapātika-ggahaṇameva kataṃ, na saṃsedaja-ggahaṇaṃ. Tañca paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ saṃsedajānaṃ opapātikesu saṅgaṇhanato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saṃsedajayonikā paripuṇṇāyatanabhāvena opapātikasaṅgahaṃ katvā vuttā’’ti. Padhānāya vā yoniyā sabbaparipuṇṇāyatanayoniṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘opapātikasattāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
754-5 依眼、耳、心所依处:即依眼十法聚、耳十法聚、心所依处十法聚。不过,阿难陀尊者在这里说:“在色界,与结生识一起生起的,是眼、耳、心所依处七法聚和命根六法聚,以这四种聚为依,有二十七种色法生起,因为色界中香、味、食已被排除。”然后,为了证明这个说法,他又说:“巴利圣典中确实说:‘色界结生刹那,除了无想有情天之外,有五处出现,有五界出现。’(《分别论》1015)同样,‘色界有六处、九界’(《分别论》994)这一说法,是为了以总括的方式显示那里存在的处和界而说的。在《论事》中,香处等也像鼻处等一样被排除,如说:‘那里有鼻处吗?’‘有。’‘那里有香处吗?’‘不应这样说。’(《论事》520)再者,就像没有触处而有地界等一样,虽然色界没有香处、味处,也不能说那里的香、味存在,为什么呢?因为就像地等自性离开了可触知性就无法存在一样,离开了香处、味处的自性,香、味的自性也不可得。如果说因为没有鼻触等作为原因,所以不称它们为处,那么‘界’这个词是用来表明没有有情、没有命者的,所以没有理由不称香界、味界。而且,必定要承认它们有法自性,因为除了自性等特征之外,没有别的。而且,诸法的处性在《双论》中已被完全说明:‘法是处吗?’‘是。’(《双论》1.处双论.13)因此,即使它们没有香处、味处的处性,也应当说它们有某种处性。如果除了触性之外另有地等自性,就像除了香、味自性之外另有某种自性,那么它们就归入法处。然而,当香的自性和处性都存在时,就是‘香又是处,所以是香处;味又是处,所以是味处’——这就已经成立了,无法阻止它们具有香处、味处的性质。从‘三食’(《分别论》1015)的说法可知,那里没有段食,所以,为了不与巴利圣典相矛盾,应当把香、味和食素除去后再计算色法。这样才符合法性,不会颠倒。巴利
754-5.Cakkhusotavatthuvasāti cakkhudasakasotadasakavatthudasakavasā. Ānandācariyo panettha ‘‘rūpadhātuyaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇena saha cakkhusotavatthusattakānaṃ jīvitachakkassāti catunnaṃ kalāpānaṃ vasena sattavīsati rūpāni uppajjanti, tattha gandharasāhārānaṃ paṭikkhittattā’’ti vatvā puna taṃ samatthento ‘‘pāḷiyañhi ‘rūpadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe ṭhapetvā asaññasattānaṃ devānaṃ pañcāyatanāni pātubhavanti, pañca dhātuyo pātubhavantī’ti (vibha. 1015) vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘rūpadhātuyā cha āyatanāni nava dhātuyo’ti (vibha. 994) sabbasaṅgāhakavasena tattha vijjamānāyatanadhātuyo dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Kathāvatthumhi ca ghānāyatanādīnaṃ viya gandhāyatanādīnañca tattha bhāvo paṭikkhitto ‘atthi tattha ghānāyatananti? Āmantā. Atthi tattha gandhāyatananti? Na hevaṃ vattabbe’tiādinā (kathā. 520). Na ca aphoṭṭhabbāyatanānaṃ pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ viya agandharasāyatanānaṃ gandharasānaṃ tattha bhāvo sakkā vattuṃ phusituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāvinimuttassa pathavīādisabhāvassa viya gandharasāyatanabhāvavinimuttassa gandharasabhāvassa abhāvā. Yadi ca ghānasamphassādīnaṃ kāraṇabhāvo natthīti tāni āyatanānīti na vucceyyuṃ, dhātusaddo pana nissattanijjīvavibhāvakoti gandhadhāturasadhātūti avacane kāraṇaṃ natthi. Dhammasabhāvo ca nesaṃ ekantena icchitabbo sabhāvadhāraṇādilakkhaṇato aññassa abhāvā. Dhammānañca āyatanabhāvo ekantato yamake vutto ‘dhammo āyatananti? Āmantā’ti (yama. 1.āyatanayamaka.13), tasmā tesaṃ gandharasāyatanabhāvābhāvepi koci āyatanabhāvo vattabbo. Yadi ca phoṭṭhabbabhāvato añño pathavīādibhāvo viya gandharasabhāvato añño tesaṃ koci sabhāvo siyā, tesaṃ dhammāyatanasaṅgaho. Gandharasabhāve, pana āyatanabhāve ca sati gandho ca so āyatanañca gandhāyatanaṃ, raso ca so āyatanañca rasāyatananti idamāpannamevāti gandharasāyatanabhāvo ca na sakkā nivāretuṃ, ‘tayo āhārā’ti (vibha. 1015) vacanato kabaḷīkārāhārassa tattha abhāvo viññāyati, tasmā yathā pāḷiyā avirodho hoti, tathā gandharasojā hitvā rūpagaṇanā kātabbā. Evañhi dhammatā na vilomatā hotī’’ti vadati.
不过,阿阇梨光护和法护两位长老否定这种说法。他们是这样说的:因为色界众生没有鼻处和舌处,所以即使香和味存在,也起不了处的作用。圣典不提及它们,而在巴利圣典里明明说了“五处出现”“六处”(《分别论》993-994)等等。又说“三食”,是因为没有可吞咽的食物,所以不能生起以食素为第八的色聚——这种名为食的作用并不存在,但并不是香、味和食素就完全没有了。也就是说,因为能取的作用不存在,所取就不能算是具有作用性质的法。在某个生存地里,如果没有能取者,那么即使所取存在,也绝对不会以它为因而成立处的意义,就像在色界里,地界、火界、风界虽然存在,却不以触处的方式来说一样。反之,某法在某处被说到,是因为那里有能取者存在为因,才说它绝对具有处的意义,就像在色界里说到色处那样。如果所取的处的意义一定要以能取者存在为因,那无想有情为什么会有二处出现呢?因为无想有情并没有眼处。难道因为没有眼处,色处就不是其他有情的所取了吗?这并不矛盾。正是因为同样的用意——色界有想者不说香处等——才不能说色处也不被宣说,否则无想者就不该说有一处了。因为按照各自的根与境来看,有些法确实具有处的意义,在列举这些法时,由于色界有想者没有香等,就不把香等单独列为处,而是依据法性不可超越,并且它们可以作为意识的所取,所以把它们归入法处,在圣典中说“五处”。为此,把“法处”作为通称,或者把它们作为附属,而说“五处”。然而,根据无想者被说有色处的同样用意,对有想者和无想者来说,香处等也应该单独列出来。为了显示这一原则,才说“无想有情天二处出现”(《分别论》1017)。巴利
Ācariyajotipāladhammapālattherā pana taṃ paṭikkhipanti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ tehi ‘‘rūpāvacarasattānaṃ ghānajivhāyatanābhāvato vijjamānāpi gandharasā āyatanakiccaṃ na karontī’’ti, te anāmasitvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pañcāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti ‘‘cha āyatanānī’’ti (vibha. 993-994) ca ādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tayo āhārā’’ti ca ajjhoharitabbassa āhārassa abhāvena ojaṭṭhamakarūpasamuṭṭhāpanasaṅkhātassa āhārakiccassa akaraṇato, na sabbena sabbaṃ gandharasānaṃ, ojāya ca abhāvato. Iti visayino kiccassa abhāvena visayo kiccabhāvadhammo na vutto. Yasmiñhi bhave visayī natthi, tasmiṃ taṃhetuko nippariyāyena visayassa āyatanabhāvo natthīti vijjamānassāpi avacanaṃ, yathā tattheva rūpabhave pathavītejovāyodhātūnaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanabhāvena. Yassa pana yattha vacanaṃ, tassa tattha visayīsabbhāvahetuko nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo vutto, yathā tattheva rūpāyatanassa. Yadi visayīsabbhāvahetuko visayassa nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo, kathamasaññasattānaṃ dve āyatanāni pātubhavanti. Asaññasattānañhi cakkhāyatanaṃ natthi. Atha tadabhāvena rūpāyatanaṃ aññesaṃ avisayoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Yena adhippāyena rūpadhātuyaṃ saññīnaṃ gandhāyatanādīnaṃ avacanaṃ, tena na rūpāyatanassāpi avacananti asaññīnaṃ ekaṃ āyatanaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Yathāsakañhi indriyagocarabhāvāpekkhāya yesaṃ nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo atthi, tesu niddisiyamānesu tadabhāvato rūpadhātuyaṃ saññīnaṃ gandhādike visuṃ āyatanabhāvena avatvā dhammasabhāvānativattanato, manoviññāṇassa ca visayabhāvūpagamanato dhammāyatanantogadhe katvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Etadatthañhi dhammāyatananti sāmaññato nāmakaraṇaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakāni vā tāni katvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena ca pana adhippāyena asaññīnaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena saññīnaṃ, asaññīnampi gandhāyatanādīnaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kātabbanti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘asaññasattānaṃ devānaṃ dve āyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1017) vuttaṃ.
即使在那里没有自己的根,色的色处自性也绝不可能被超越,所以它仍然被称为色处。通过这一理趣的展示,把香等三处纳入进来之后,有想者有八处,无想者有五处——这个意义就显示出来了。应当这样接受;否则,由于在色界中无法触,地等对梵天来说就不存在,他们的语声也就不会有了。因为如果没有撞击和摩擦,声音就不可能生起;而具有可触自性的事物,在任何地方都不可能被认知为不可触的自性。再者,如果色有中没有触处和三种大种,那么色处等的存在就根本不可能。因此,虽然地等在那里是可以触的,但由于没有身根,就没有说它们具有触处的性质。这样,色界中它们具有有对性的说法也就成立了。因为确实有说:“无想有情依一种不可见有对的大种……中略……依二种大种”等等。巴利
Asatipi hi tattha attano indriyesu rūpassa vaṇṇāyatanasabhāvātikkamo natthevāti taṃ rūpāyatanantveva vuccati. Iminā ca nayadassanena gandhādīni tīṇi pakkhipitvā saññīnaṃ aṭṭha āyatanāni, asaññīnaṃ pañcāti ayamattho dassito hoti. Evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā rūpaloke phusituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pathavīādīnaṃ brahmūnaṃ vacīghoso eva ca na siyā. Na hi paṭighaṭṭananighaṃsanamantarena saddappavatti atthi, na ca phusanasabhāvānaṃ katthaci aphusanasabhāvatā sakkā viññātuṃ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanassa ca bhūtattayassa abhāve rūpabhave rūpāyatanādīnampi sambhavo eva na siyā, tasmā phusituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāyapi pathavīādīnaṃ tattha kāyindriyābhāvena tesaṃ phoṭṭhabbabhāvo na vutto. Evañca katvā rūpadhātuyaṃ tesaṃ sappaṭighatāvacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi ‘‘asaññasattānaṃ anidassanasappaṭighaṃ ekaṃ mahābhūtaṃ paṭicca…pe… dve mahābhūtā’’tiādi.
“对碍”是指三种大种撞击身净色——即依止大种之撞击——通过门而现前。但在这里,它指的是那种自性本身;而由于没有撞击,它不可能被触及,所以这种“对碍”并不存在。如果在能缘者不存在的情况下,仍然取色处而说为“二处”,那为什么不取香处等而说为“五处”呢?其含义已如前所说:开示是依照理趣显示的方式进行的。或者,那里唯说色处,有时是就色成为其他地净色之所缘而言的,并不是因为其他处不存在,也不是因为香处等没有间接的处义。巴利
Paṭigho ca nāma bhūtattayassa kāyapasādaṃ pati tannissayabhūtaghaṭṭanaṃ dvārena abhimukhabhāvo, idha pana taṃsabhāvatā, so ca phusituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvo ghaṭṭanāya abhāvato natthi. Yadi tattha asatipi visayimhi rūpāyatanampi gahetvā ‘‘dve āyatanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kasmā gandhāyatanādīni gahetvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti na vuttanti? Nayadassanavasena desanā pavattāti vuttovāyamattho. Atha vā tattha rūpāyatanasseva vacanaṃ kadāci aññabhūmikānaṃ pasādassa visayabhāvaṃ sandhāya, na pana itaresaṃ abhāvato, nāpi pariyāyena gandhāyatanādīnaṃ āyatanabhāvābhāvato.
无想有情众生的色处,能成为同地而居的广果天众生以及更高地界的净居天众净色的所缘对象,但香和味不能,因此对它们不加提及是合理的。在《论事》中,是针对那些究竟了知香处等确实存在的人,才作了否定。即使这句话在那里并不是要说明香处等不存在,但难道没有别的说法表明它们存在吗?并非如此,因为注释书中已经确定地说明了香处等在那里是存在的。凡是与巴利圣典不相违的注释书说法,都和圣典一样是权威依据,因为它是经由无可指责的历代师承一直流传到今天的。在这里或许有人会问:“凡是与巴利圣典不相违的注释书说法才是权威依据,但这个说法难道不与圣典相违吗?”并非如此,因为已经说明它并不相违。为了显示眼等处以及依它们而生的诸识这七种空性,世尊宣说了界论;既然已经以处的方式说明了它们的界义,那么不再另外宣说它们的界义,也是合理的。因此应当知道,这里按照眼十法聚等来计算色法,与巴利圣典并不相违,在这里不应生起违背法性的疑惑。巴利
Asaññīnañhi rūpāyatanaṃ samānatalavāsīnaṃ vehapphalānaṃ, uparibhūmikānañca suddhāvāsānaṃ pasādassa visayabhāvaṃ gacchati, na pana gandharasāti tesaṃyeva tattha avacanaṃ yuttaṃ. Kathāvatthumhi ca nippariyāyena gandhāyatanādīnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ parijānantaṃ sandhāya paṭisedho kato. Yadipi cetaṃ vacanaṃ tattha gandhāyatanādīnaṃ abhāvavibhāvanaṃ na hoti, atthibhāvadīpanampi pana aññavacanaṃ natthevāti? Nayidamevaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu tattha tesaṃ atthibhāvassa niddhāretvā vuttattā. Yañhi aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ pāḷiyā na virujjhati, taṃ pāḷi viya pamāṇabhūtaṃ avigarahitāya ācariyaparamparāya yāvajjatanā āgatattā. Tattha siyā ‘‘yaṃ pāḷiyā na virujjhati aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, taṃ pamāṇaṃ, idaṃ pana virujjhatī’’ti? Nayidamevaṃ, yathā na virujjhati, tathā paṭipāditattā. Cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanānaṃ, tannissayānañca viññāṇānaṃ sattasuññatāsandassanatthaṃ bhagavato dhātudesanāti āyatanabhāvena vuttānaṃyeva dhātubhāvadīpanato dhātubhāvassāpi tesaṃ avacanaṃ yujjati eva, tasmā yathā pāḷiyā avirodho hoti, tathā cakkhudasakādivasena idha rūpagaṇanā katāti na ettha dhammatāvilomanāsaṅkāya okāsoti veditabbanti.
756 生盲聋是为了保护韵律而作的长音。因为对于具有生盲、聋、无鼻的中性人,以基、身、舌十法聚来说此处有三十色,是不合理的。而此说是引用了注释书的说法:“对于化生的、具有生盲、聋、无鼻的中性人,依舌、身、基十法聚而生起三十种色。”然而,阿难陀阿阇梨却以“此与巴利圣典不符”为由,反对此说。他如此说道:“此与巴利圣典不符。”因为在巴利圣典中,并未宣说欲界的湿生、化生者中有无鼻者的生起。巴利
756.Jaccandhabadhirāti chandānurakkhaṇatthaṃ dīghakaraṇaṃ. Na hi jaccandhabadhiraaghānarahite napuṃsake vatthukāyajivhādasakavasena idha tiṃsāti yujjati, idañca ‘‘opapātikassa jaccandhabadhiraghānarahite napuṃsake jivhākāyavatthudasakānaṃ vasena tiṃsa rūpāni uppajjantī’’ti aṭṭhakathāvādaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ānandācariyo pana taṃ ‘‘pāḷiyā na sametī’’ti vatvā paṭikkhipati. Tathā cāha ‘‘netaṃ pāḷiyā sametī’’ti. Na hi pāḷiyaṃ kāmāvacarānaṃ saṃsedajopapātikānaṃ aghānakānaṃ uppatti vuttā.
在《法心分别》里确实这样说:巴利
Dhammahadayavibhaṅge hi –
在欲界结生的那一刹那,有些众生有十一个处现起,有些众生有十个处现起,有些众生有另外十个处现起,有些众生有九个处现起,有些众生有七个处现起。巴利
‘‘Kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, kassaci dasāyatanāni, kassaci aparāni dasāyatanāni, kassaci navāyatanāni, kassaci sattāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1009) –
已经说过,但并没有说“八处现起”。如果无鼻者也能投生,那就应该说三遍“十处现起”,还要说三遍“九处现起”,可是并没有这样说。而且《双论》里说鼻处和舌处同时生起,这要仔细考察之后再采纳。这里论师的意图是:在《法心分别》的巴利文里,“十一”是指诸根具足者,除了声处之外有十一处;“某些人有十处”是指盲者,除了眼处;“另一些人有十处”是指聋者,除了耳处;“九处”是指盲聋者,除了眼和耳两处;“七处”是就胎生者而说,按色、香、味、身、触、意、法处来算。如果眼、耳、鼻有缺陷的人也能投生,那就应该说他只有八处,但并没有说“八处现起”,所以眼、耳、鼻有缺陷的人根本不存在。如果有无鼻者的投生,那就还应该再说“某些人另有十处现起”。这样一来,就像依盲聋者说了一次“某些人有九处现起”那样,也应该依盲而无鼻者、聋而无鼻者说“某些人另有九处,某些人另有九处”。因为在欲有中不存在无舌的众生,而且《双论》说鼻处和舌处同时生起,所以欲界中无鼻者不可能存在。巴利
Vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti. Yadi hi aghānakassāpi upapatti siyā, tikkhattuṃ ‘‘dasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, tikkhattuñca ‘‘navāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti, na cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yamake ca ghānajivhānaṃ sahappavatti vuttāti taṃ upaparikkhitvā gahetabbanti. Ayañhettha ācariyassa adhippāyo – dhammahadayavibhaṅgapāḷiyañhi ‘‘ekādasā’’ti paripuṇṇāyatanassa saddāyatanavajjāni ekādasāyatanāni vuttāni, ‘‘kassaci dasāyatanānī’’ti andhassa cakkhāyatanavajjāni, ‘‘aparāni dasāyatanānī’’ti badhirassa sotāyatanavajjāni, ‘‘navāyatanānī’’ti andhabadhirassa cakkhusotavajjāni, ‘‘sattāyatanānī’’ti gabbhaseyyakassa rūpagandharasakāyaphoṭṭhabbamanadhammāyatanavasena vuttaṃ. Yadi cakkhusotaghānavikalopi uppajjeyya, tassa aṭṭhevāyatanāni vattabbāni siyuṃ, na ca vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti, tasmā nattheva cakkhusotaghānavikalo. Sati aghānakaupapattiyaṃ punapi ‘‘kassaci aparāni dasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Tathā ca sati yathā andhabadhirassa vasena ‘‘kassaci navāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti ekavāraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ andhāghānakassa, badhirāghānakassa ca vasena ‘‘kassaci aparāni navāyatanāni, kassaci aparāni navāyatanānī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Kāmabhave ajivhassa sattassābhāvato, ghānajivhāyatanānaṃ sahappavattivacanato ca tattheva kāmadhātuyaṃ aghānakassāsambhavoti.
乔提帕拉长老等人则说:“按照湿生的生来眼盲、生来耳聋、无鼻、非男非女者的舌十法、身十法、心所依处十法,有三十种色生起”,这是就湿生者说的,不是就化生者说的。而在《法心分别》的巴利文中,因为说的是“在结生刹那”,所以是依化生者来引导这个理路的。《双论注》中也说:“欲界中没有无鼻的化生者。如果有的话,就该说某人有八处现起。”另外,《法心分别》在解说“欲界结生刹那,某人十一处现起”等时,只举了“化生的饿鬼”等,用的是化生者,并没有用湿生者。这应当理解为:这是把诸根具足的湿生者归入化生者之中来说的。正如注书中所说:“湿生者因为诸根具足,所以被归入化生者来说。”或者说,为了以主要的生类统摄一切诸根具足的生处来显示,才说“化生者”。因此,巴利文上没有任何矛盾。巴利
Jotipālattherādayo pana ‘‘saṃsedajassa jaccandhabadhiraaghānakanapuṃsakassa jivhākāyavatthudasakānaṃ vasena tiṃsarūpāni uppajjantīti vuttaṃ, na opapātikassa. Dhammahadayavibhaṅgapāḷiyañca ‘upapattikkhaṇe’ti vuttattā opapātikasseva vasena nayo nīto. Yamakaṭṭhakathāyañca vuttaṃ ‘kāmadhātuyaṃ aghānako opapātiko natthi. Yadi bhaveyya, kassaci aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantīti vadeyyā’ti, yampi dhammahadayavibhaṅge ‘kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’tiādīnaṃ niddese ‘opapātikānaṃ petāna’ntiādinā opapātika-ggahaṇameva kataṃ, na pana saṃsedaja-ggahaṇaṃ, taṃ paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃyeva saṃsedajānaṃ opapātikesu saṅgahavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘saṃsedajayonikā paripuṇṇāyatanabhāvena opapātikasaṅgahaṃ katvā vuttā’ti, padhānāya vā yoniyā sabbaṃ paripuṇṇāyatanaṃ yoniṃ saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘opapātikāna’nti vuttanti ca, tasmā na koci pāḷivirodho’’ti vadanti.
另有一些人这样说:欲界里没有无鼻的化生者。如果有的话,就该说某些有情有八处现起。这话是就人间的湿生和化生者说的,他们都是诸根具足的。可是,因为确实存在某些无鼻的昆虫,所以这话是针对恶趣中的湿生和化生者说的。按阿难陀阿阇梨等人的主张,这种说法只应当驳斥。巴利
Apare panāhu – ‘‘kāmadhātuyaṃ aghānako opapātiko natthi. Yadi bhaveyya, kassaci aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantīti vadeyyāti idaṃ manussesu saṃsedajopapātikānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, te paripuṇṇāyatanāva . Kesañci pana aghānakakīṭānaṃ atthibhāvato apāyesu saṃsedajopapātike sandhāyetaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Taṃ ānandācariyādīnaṃ matena paṭikkhepārahamevāti.
757-8 “最高与最低之间”,是指“七十”所说的最高界限和“三十”所说的最低界限之间的范围。“相应地……能分别者”的意思是:天生眼盲的人有六十种色,因为没有眼十法;同样,天生耳聋的人因为没有耳十法也是如此;而既盲又聋的人则有五十种色,因为没有眼十法和耳十法。应当依照这类方式,从彼此相对来看,依诸根具足与诸根不具足之色而了知色的生起。这里应当说的,已经说过了。巴利
757-8.Ukkaṃsassāvakaṃsassa antareti ‘‘sattatī’’ti vuttaukkaṃsaparicchedassa, ‘‘tiṃsā’’ti vuttaavakaṃsaparicchedassa ca majjhe. Anurūpato…pe… vibhāvināti jātiandhassa saṭṭhi rūpāni cakkhudasakābhāvato, tathā badhirassa sotadasakābhāvato, andhabadhirassa pana paṇṇāsa cakkhusotadasakābhāvatotiādinā nayena aññamaññāpekkhāya paripuṇṇā paripuṇṇānaṃ rūpānaṃ pāṇīnaṃ vasena rūpānaṃ samuppatti viññātabbāti attho. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttamevāti.
759-60 已经这样说明了在三有中结生时色法生起的情况,现在为了说明转起时的情形,而说了“二十七色”等。对于欲界有情,如果诸根具足,没有盲、聋等净色受损的情况,那么直到死亡心之前的第十七心,都有二十七种色在转起。对于诸根不具足的有情,比如天生眼盲等,则应按照前面所说的方式,了知色法的减少和增加。难道不是只有二十八种色在欲有中转起吗?所以说“因不转起”等。巴利
759-60. Evaṃ tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhiyaṃ rūpappavattiṃ dassetvā idāni pavattiyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattavīsati rūpānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmāvacarasattassa hi paripuṇṇāyatanassa asati andhabadhirādipasādavighāte yāva maraṇacittassa heṭṭhā sattarasamacittaṃ, tāva sattavīsati rūpāni pavattanti. Aparipuṇṇāyatanassa pana jaccandhādikassa heṭṭhā vuttanayena rūpānaṃ hāyanavaḍḍhanāni veditabbāni. Nanu aṭṭhavīsatiyeva rūpāni kāmabhave pavattantīti āha ‘‘appavattanato’’tiādi.
鼻……不存在,意思是:由于修习离欲,对执取香等的净色已经离染,所以鼻等三种不存在。但眼和耳为了无上见等目的并没有离染,所以它们会在这些人身上生起。男女二根因为以欲贪为依托,所以不生起。有些人说:“轻快性等三种在色有中也不存在,因为没有造成迟钝等的界扰动。如果真有那样的界扰动,就应该有与它相对的轻快性等。”这种说法不合理。因为并不是观待应当止息的对立面,就一定有与它相违的法生起。如果真是那样,那么在有因唯作心生起时,身轻快性等就应该根本不存在。因此,有想梵天中只有五种色不生起,其余二十三种色生起。而无想梵天中,除去五种净色、男女二根、心所依处、两种表色、轻快性等三种,共十三种色不生起,其余十五种色生起。巴利
Ghānaṃ…pe… na vijjareti kāmavirāgabhāvanāvasena gandhādiggāhakesu pasādesu virattā hontīti ghānādittayaṃ natthi. Cakkhusotesu pana anuttaradassanādiatthaṃ virattā na hontīti tāni tesaṃ uppajjanti. Bhāvadvayaṃ kāmarāgūpanissayattā na uppajjati. Keci pana ‘‘lahutādittayampi rūpabhave natthi dandhattakarādidhātukkhobhābhāvato. Sati hi tādise dhātukkhobhe tappaṭipakkhehi lahutādīhi bhavitabba’’nti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi vūpasametabbapaccanīkāpekkho tabbirodhidhammuppādo. Tathā sati sahetukakiriyacittuppādesu kāyalahutādīnaṃ abhāvo eva siyā, tasmā pañceva rūpāni saññībrahmānaṃ na uppajjanti, avasesāni tevīsati rūpāni uppajjanti. Asaññībrahmānaṃ pana pañca pasādarūpāni, bhāvadvayaṃ, hadayavatthu, viññattidvayaṃ, lahutādittayanti terasa rūpāni vajjetvā avasesāni pannarasa uppajjanti.
761 四相续:依四种缘而有四类相续色。在色法中,有三相续:因为梵天没有食物,所以没有食生色,因此只有三种相续。有二相续:因为没有心生色和食生色,所以只有两种相续。外界有一相续:因为没有业生色等三种,所以只有时节生色这一种相续。巴利
761.Catusantatīti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ vasena catusantatirūpāni. Rūpe honti tisantatīti brahmānaṃ anāhārabhāvena āhārajarūpānaṃ abhāvato tisso santatiyo. Dvisantatīti cittajāhārajānaṃ abhāvato dve santatiyo. Bahiddhā ekasantatīti kammajādīnaṃ tissannampi abhāvato utujasantatiyeva.
762-4 像这样,在结生和转起中说明了色的数量限定之后,现在为了显示它们在那里生起的次序,所以说了“色正在生起”等话。“一切”是指欲界和色界的一切众生。至于“在结生刹那”这一句,应补入“有三组十法”这个余文。因此说“正如”等话。结生刹那的三组十法,虽然前面已经说过,但为了显示“而那确实是结生心的”等特别之处,所以再次说了。因为在心的三个刹那中,业生色都生起,所以说“同样地”等话。“三十、三十”就是三十、三十业生色。巴利
762-4. Evaṃ paṭisandhipavattīsu rūpānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ vatvā idāni tattha nesaṃ uppattikkamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ nibbattamāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbesanti kāmarūpabhavikānaṃ sabbasattānaṃ. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe panāti ettha dasakattayaṃ hotīti pāṭhaseso. Tenāha ‘‘yathevā’’tiādi. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe dasakattayaṃ heṭṭhā vuttampi ‘‘tañca kho sandhicittassā’’tiādikaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ puna vuttaṃ. Cittassa tīsu khaṇesu kammajarūpānaṃ samuppattito āha ‘‘tathevā’’tiādi. Tiṃsa tiṃsevāti tiṃsa tiṃseva kammajarūpāni.
阿难陀师长则说:心的住刹那根本不存在,而在灭刹那也没有色的生起,所以四种等起色都只在心的生刹那才有。他确实这样说过:这里所说的心的住刹那,应当审察它到底是有还是无。因为在《心双论》中,对“已生、正在生”的分析里,只说了“在灭刹那,是已生而非正在生”,并没有说“在住刹那和灭刹那”。同样,对“非正在生、非已生”,也只说了“在灭刹那,非正在生而非非已生”,并没有说“在住刹那和灭刹那”。这样,在“非已灭、非正在灭”的完整解答中,说了“在生刹那以及未来”之后,并没有提到“在住刹那”;在超越时分的部分中,说了“在灭刹那,心已超越生刹那”之后,也没有提到“在住刹那”,这就表明了心没有住刹那。经中虽说“住者的变异性被了知”,但同一法并没有变异性,被了知的变异性其实是相续而住,所以不能说它不可说。存在的法要具备两个刹那,才可称为有住。这里所说的心在灭刹那有色生起,也应当审察。为什么呢?因为《双论》中说:“或者有人,他的集谛若灭,他的苦谛就生起吗?不是。”而且不能认为这个否定只是针对心生色而说的,因为并没有专门讨论心生色的章节。巴利
Ānandācariyo pana ‘‘cittassa ṭhitikkhaṇameva natthi, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca rūpuppādo natthīti catusamuṭṭhānikānipi rūpāni cittassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva hontī’’ti āha. Vuttañhi tena – yo cettha cittassa ṭhitikkhaṇo vutto, so ca atthi natthīti vicāretabbo. Cittayamake hi ‘‘uppannaṃ uppajjamāna’’nti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.81) etassa vibhaṅge ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇe uppannaṃ no ca uppajjamāna’’nti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.81) ettakameva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitikkhaṇe bhaṅgakkhaṇe cā’’ti. Tathā’’na uppajjamānaṃ na uppanna’’nti ettha ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇe na uppajjamānaṃ no ca na uppanna’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitikkhaṇe bhaṅgakkhaṇe cā’’ti. Evaṃ ‘‘na niruddhaṃ na nirujjhamāna’’nti etesaṃ paripuṇṇavissajjane ‘‘uppādakkhaṇe anāgatañcā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ṭhitikkhaṇe’’ti avacanaṃ, atikkantakālavāre ca ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇe cittaṃ uppādakkhaṇaṃ vītikkanta’’nti (yama. 2.cittayamaka.83) vatvā ‘‘ṭhitikkhaṇe’’ti avacanaṃ ṭhitikkhaṇābhāvaṃ cittassa dīpeti. Suttepi hi ‘‘ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47) tasseva ekassa aññathattābhāvato yassā aññathattaṃ paññāyati, sā santatiṭṭhitīti na na sakkā vattuṃ. Vijjamānaṃ taṃkhaṇadvayasamaṅgī ṭhitanti. Yo cettha cittassa nirodhakkhaṇe rūpuppādo vutto, so ca vicāretabbo. Kasmā? ‘‘Yassa vā pana samudayasaccaṃ nirujjhati, tassa dukkhasaccaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti (yama. 1.saccayamaka.136) vuttanti, na ca cittasamuṭṭhānarūpameva sandhāya paṭikkhepo katoti sakkā viññātuṃ cittasamuṭṭhānarūpādhikārassa abhāvāti.
这位阿阇黎的本意是这样的:在“已生、正在生”等章节里不说“住刹那”,就是在表明“心并没有所谓的住刹那”这个意思。因为在如法宣说的阿毗达摩中,对于一个确实存在、可以找到的法却不加宣说,是看不出有什么理由的。而且不只是阿毗达摩中没说这一点能说明心没有住刹那,经藏里也有“住者的变异被了知”这样的文句。所谓变异,就是前后状态的差别。再说,一个法如实地生起之后,它是如实地灭去,还是变成另一种状态才灭去呢?如果是如实地灭去,那就不会有老。如果是变成另一种状态才灭去,那就成了完全不同的另一个法,这样一来,住刹那无论如何都不存在。假如心在灭刹那能生起色法,那就不能把那个色法当作苦谛而说“不是”,但经里已经说了“不是”,由此可知:心在灭刹那并没有色法生起。巴利
Ācariyassa hi ayamadhippāyo – uppannauppajjamānavārādīsu ‘‘ṭhitikkhaṇe’’ti avacanaṃ ‘‘cittassa ṭhitikkhaṇaṃ nāma natthī’’ti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Na hi yathādhammasāsane abhidhamme labbhamānassa avacane kāraṇaṃ dissati. Na kevalaṃ abhidhamme avacanameva cittassa ṭhitikkhaṇabhāvajotakaṃ, apica kho ‘‘ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti evamāgatā suttantapāḷipi. Aññathattaṃ nāma pubbāparaviseso. Apica yathā bhūto dhammo uppajjati, kiṃ tathā bhūtova bhijjati, udāhu aññathā bhūto. Yadi tathā bhūtova bhijjati, na jaratāya sambhavo. Aññathā bhūto, añño eva soti sabbathāpi ṭhitikkhaṇassa abhāvoyeva. Yadi ca cittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe rūpaṃ uppajjeyya, taṃ dukkhasaccanti katvā ‘‘no’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, vuttañca, tasmā viññāyati ‘‘cittassa nirodhakkhaṇe rūpuppādo natthī’’ti.
不过,论师觉护和法护两位长老并不接受这种说法。他们主张:即使是在同一个法所依的基础上,生与灭的生刹那是一个,灭刹那则是另一个。因为依托于生的状态,所以是生刹那;因为依托于灭的状态,所以是灭刹那。而生的状态和灭的状态是截然不同的,因此在同一个自性法当中,应该按照所希望的那样来理解,否则就会得出一个法生起、另一个法灭去的结论。这样一来,正如有灭的状态,也应该有朝向灭的状态,那就是住和老性。这种说法应当被接受。巴利
Ācariyajotipāladhammapālattherānaṃ panetaṃ nakkhamati. Tehi ‘‘ekadhammādhārabhāvepi uppādanirodhānaṃ añño uppādakkhaṇo, añño nirodhakkhaṇo. Uppādāvatthañhi upādāya uppādakkhaṇo, nirodhāvatthaṃ upādāya nirodhakkhaṇo. Uppādāvatthāya ca bhinnā nirodhāvatthāti ekasmiṃyeva ca sabhāvadhamme yathā icchitabbā, aññathā aññoyeva dhammo uppajjati, añño nirujjhatīti āpajjeyya, evaṃ nirodhāvatthāya viya nirodhābhimukhāvatthāyapi bhavitabbaṃ, sā ṭhiti jaratā cā’’ti sampaṭicchitabbametaṃ.
如果是这样,为什么在巴利圣典里没有说到“住刹那”呢?应该知道,这是为了随顺所教化者的意乐,以显示理路的方式才收进圣典的。因为阿毗达摩的说法,有时也是随顺所教化者的意乐而展开的,比如把色的生起拆开来,说成“积集”和“相续”。这里可以举出因相应二法等说法作为例子。在回答“或者,若某人……”这类问难时,也可以针对无色界或心生色而说“不是”。这本来就是双论说法的常规做法,也就是随应而搭配。或者,按邻近的道理来说:当某个集谛灭去时,由它应当生起的苦谛——也就是与心、心所相连的色法——在那一刻并没有生起,所以说“不是”,并不是针对一切情况而言。因此,不能说心在住刹那和灭刹那就不可能生起色法。这是他们的主张。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kasmā pāḷiyaṃ ṭhitikkhaṇo na vuttoti? Vineyyajjhāsayānurodhena nayadassanavasena pāḷigatīti veditabbāti. Abhidhammadesanāpi hi kadāci vineyyajjhāsayānurodhena pavattati, yathā rūpassa uppādo ‘‘upacayo santatī’’ti bhinditvā desito. Hetusampayuttadukādidesanā cettha nidassitabbā. ‘‘Yassa vā panā’’tiādipucchāya vissajjane ca arūpalokaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘no’’ti sakkā vattuṃ. Ayañhi yamakadesanāya pakati, yadidaṃ yathāsambhavayojanāti. Atha vā paccāsattiñāyena yaṃ samudayasaccaṃ nirujjhati, tena yaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ uppādetabbaṃ cittacetasikatappaṭibaddharūpasaṅkhātaṃ, tassa tadā uppatti natthīti ‘‘no’’ti vissajjanaṃ, na sabbassa vacanato, tasmā na sakkā cittassa ṭhitikkhaṇe, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca rūpuppādanaṃ paṭikkhipitunti vadanti.
时节生色则从结生心的住刹那开始,按八法聚和九法聚的方式生起。因为在结生刹那生起的业生色当中,俱生的同生同灭火界到达住位之后,就在它的住刹那引生八种色法;在那里生起的火界,又在结生心的灭刹那引生八种色法;在那里生起的火界,又在第一个有分的生刹那引生八种色法——如此类推为八法聚。有时候在声音出现时,就与声音一起以声九法聚生起。心生色则从结生之后紧接着的第一个有分开始,在能生色的心生起的刹那,以八法聚的方式生起;在声音等出现的时候,则以声九法聚等方式生起。食生色则要经过一个或两个七日之后才生起。难道不是以咽下的食物为缘,食素才引生色法吗?可是躺在母胎里的胎儿,哪来咽下的食物呢?来自母亲。因为母亲吃下的食物,在胎儿体内起到像涂抹一样的食的作用。因此古人说:巴利
Utujarūpāni pana paṭisandhicittassa ṭhitikkhaṇato paṭṭhāya aṭṭhakanavakavasena uppajjanti. Paṭisandhikkhaṇe hi uppannānaṃ kammajarūpānaṃ abbhantare sahuppādaekanirodhatejodhātu ṭhānaṃ patvā tassa ṭhitikkhaṇe aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpeti, tattha uppannā tejodhātu paṭisandhicittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe, tattha uppannā paṭhamabhavaṅgassa uppādakkhaṇeti evamādinā aṭṭhakaṃ, kadāci saddapātubhāvakāle tena saha saddanavakañca uppajjati. Cittajarūpāni ca paṭisandhito anantaraṃ paṭhamabhavaṅgato paṭṭhāya rūpajanakacittānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe aṭṭhakavasena, saddapātubhāvādikāle saddanavakādivasena ca pavattanti. Āhārajāni pana ekassa, dvinnaṃ vā sattāhānaṃ atikkamena nibbattanti. Nanu ca ajjhohaṭāhārapaccayena āhāro rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, gabbhe sayantassa ca kuto ajjhoharaṇāhāroti? Samātito. Mātarā hi bhuttaṃ kucchigatassa sarīre abbhañjanaṃ viya āhārakiccaṃ karoti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
而他的母亲所吃的东西,
食物、饮料与食品;
他就靠这个在那里活下去,
住在母胎里的人。巴利
‘‘Yañcassa bhuñjatī mātā, Annaṃ pānañca bhojanaṃ; Tena so tattha yāpeti, Mātukucchigato naro’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.235);
因此,在母亲吃下的食物所滋养的身体里,体内的食素得到条件后,就使色法生起。而眼、耳、鼻、舌、身的十法聚,则要超过五种净色所依之处,后来在第七个七天时生起。阿难陀导师说:“在第十一个七天。”(《双论·根本复注·处双论》22-254)这就是胎生者色法转起的方式。巴利
Tasmā mātarā ajjhohaṭāhārena anuggahite sarīre abbhantarikā ojā laddhappaccayā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, cakkhusotaghānajivhādasakā pana pañcapasādāvatthaṃ atikkamma pacchā sattame sattāhe uppajjanti, ‘‘ekādasame sattāhe’’ti (yama. mūlaṭī. āyatanayamaka 22-254) ānandācariyo avoca. Ayamettha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ rūpappavattinayo.
化生者也是在结生心生起的刹那,有七十种业生色生起;同样,在它住立的刹那和坏灭的刹那,也各有七十种生起。按照“七十、七十”等所说的方式,从最高到最低,欲界有情的业生色和时节生色的转起,应当依照前面所说的方式,随其相应而了知;色界梵天的也是如此。至于食生色,对欲界众生来说,最早是在吞咽自己口中的唾液时生起。对有想梵天来说,食生色完全不存在。对无想众生来说,心生色和食生色都不存在,这就是差别。当这些色法这样生起时,在心生起的刹那生起的色,以与它同时生起的心为起点,到第十七心的坏灭刹那灭去;在住立刹那生起的色,到第十八心的生起刹那灭去;在坏灭刹那生起的色,到这个心的住立刹那灭去。这样生起、灭去,直到死心之前的第十七心为止,随其相应,以四种相续等方式转起。然而,对临近死亡者来说,从死心之前的第十七心的住立刹那开始,业生色就不再生起。如果它还生起,就不会有死亡,因为业生色没有断绝。当业生色断绝时,就说“死了”。确实说过:巴利
Opapātikānampi paṭisandhicittassa uppādakkhaṇe kammasamuṭṭhānāni sattati rūpāni uppajjanti, tathevassa ṭhitikkhaṇe, bhaṅgakkhaṇe ca sattati sattatītiādinā vuttanayena ukkaṃsāvakaṃsato kāmabhavikasattānaṃ, rūpībrahmānañca yathāvuttanayeneva yathānurūpaṃ kammasamuṭṭhānānaṃ, utusamuṭṭhānānañca pavatti veditabbā. Āhārajarūpaṃ pana kāmāvacarānaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ attano mukhagatakheḷaṃ ajjhoharaṇakāle uppajjati. Saññībrahmānaṃ taṃ sabbena sabbaṃ natthi. Asaññīnañca cittajāhārajāni natthevāti ayaṃ viseso. Evaṃ uppajjamānesu ca panetesu rūpesu yaṃ cittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppannaṃ, taṃ attanā sahuppannacittaṃ ādiṃ katvā sattarasamacittassa nirodhakkhaṇe nirujjhati, ṭhitikkhaṇe uppannaṃ aṭṭhārasamassa uppādakkhaṇe nirujjhati, bhaṅgakkhaṇe uppannaṃ imassa ṭhitikkhaṇe nirujjhatīti evaṃ uppajjantaṃ, nirujjhantañca yāva maraṇacittassa heṭṭhā sattarasamacittaṃ, tāva yathārahaṃ catusantatiādivasena pavattatīti. Āsannamaraṇassa pana cutito sattarasamacittassa ṭhitikkhaṇamādiṃ katvā kammajarūpaṃ na samuṭṭhāti. Yadi samuṭṭhāti, maraṇaṃ na siyā anupacchinnattā kammajarūpānaṃ. Kammajarūpasamucchede hi ‘‘mato’’ti vuccati. Vuttañhi –
寿命、体温和识,当它们离开这个身体时,
那时,被丢弃的身体就躺在那里,像一块没用的朽木。巴利
‘‘Āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantimaṃ; Apaviddho tadā seti, niratthaṃva kaliṅgara’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 3.95);
与第十七心一同生起的业生色,也连同死心一起灭去,之后不再生起。由于寿命耗尽、业耗尽、两者都耗尽,或者因为某人采取杀害手段,死亡就只发生在业生色上,虽然食生色也存在,按注疏的意见心生色也存在。那些色法在生命离开后也不再生起。但时节生色仍然继续存在。湿生众生也是如此;不过化生众生因为没有留下尸体,所以时节生色也不继续存在。巴利
Sattarasamena saha uppannañca taṃ cuticittena saha nirujjhati, aparañca na uppajjati. Āyukkhayā, kammakkhayā, ubhayakkhayā, upakkamena vā kassacīti evaṃ kammajarūpasseva hi maraṇaṃ hoti satipi āhāraje, aṭṭhakathāmatena cittaje ca. Tampi apagatajīvassa na uppajjati. Utujarūpaṃ pana pavattati eva. Tathā saṃsedajānaṃ, opapātikānaṃ pana sarīranikkhepābhāvato tampi na pavattati.
765-6 它因为具有生起和坏灭,所以不是恒常、不是稳定,因此叫“无常”;或者因为它是刹那刹那地存在,不是可欲的,不能以“恒常”等想法去执取,所以叫“无常”。这个坏灭不依靠生起因缘之外的其他原因,所以决定是刹那刹那地坏灭。因为没有坚固的核心,所以叫“不坚固”。因为不能自主掌控,所以叫“无我”。由于被生起和坏灭逼迫,又是苦的所依处,所以这个蕴聚就是苦的聚集,叫“苦蕴”。而这样的蕴完全不和乐混杂,所以说“纯一”。又因为任何色都没有乐的本性,整个就是苦蕴,所以说“苦蕴纯一”。由于要靠诸缘维持才能延续,又是一切病的根源,所以叫“病”。它只能随顺因缘勉强维持,就像需要靠调养维持的病一样,所以应当看作病。需要靠调养维持的病是疾病,另一种是重病;而这个蕴就像根本病,因为它是种种随之而来的病——烦恼病等——的根本,所以应当看作病。由于和苦性、刺痛相连,由于烦恼不净不断流漏,又因为生、老、坏灭而像肿胀、成熟、破裂一样,所以叫“痈”。它和三种苦——苦苦性、行苦性、变易苦性——所说的逼迫相连;又随宜以所缘和相应的方式流出贪等烦恼不净;又因为从无而生起;生起时像肿胀,老和坏灭时依次像成熟和破裂,所以和痈相似,应当看作痈。因为不能自主掌控,也不能支配,所以叫“他”。就像别人跌倒时,不会随另一个人的意愿一样;同样,这个蕴不能以净、乐等状态随意控制,所以不能自主掌控;也不能用“不要老、不要死”等来命令它,所以不能支配,应当看作“他”。因为被病、老、死所破坏,被逼恼,所以叫“坏”。这个蕴以病等方式破裂、坏灭,或被这些逼恼,所以具有祸患义的世间词“坏”特别具有逼恼义,应当看作“坏”。以贪染而转起的欲贪。巴利
765-6. Uppādavayavantatāya nicco dhuvo na hotīti anicco, niccakhaṇikatāya vā na icco sassatādivasena anupagantabboti anicco. Ayañhi vināso janakapaccayato aññahetunirapekkhatāya niccakhaṇikova hoti. Dhuvasāravirahitattā addhuvo. Avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā. Udayavayapaṭipīḷanena, dukkhavatthutāya ca dukkhānaṃ khandho samūhoti dukkhakkhandho. Evaṃvidho pana sukhehi asammissoyevāti āha ‘‘kevalo’’ti. Kassacipi vā rūpassa sukhasabhāvassa abhāvato sakalopi dukkhakkhandhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhakkhandho ca kevalo’’ti. Paccayayāpaniyatāya ca rogamūlatāya ca rogato. So hi yathārahaṃ paccayehi yāpetabbatāya yāpyarogo viyāti rogato daṭṭhabbo. Yāpyabyādhi hi rogo, itaro ābādho, mūlabyādhi viya cesa anubaddhabyādhīnaṃ kilesarogādīnaṃ mūlabhāvato rogato daṭṭhabbo. Dukkhatāsūlayogitāya, kilesāsucipaggharaṇatāya , uppādajarābhaṅgehi uddhumātaparipakkapabhinnatāya ca gaṇḍato. So hi dukkhadukkhatā saṅkhāradukkhatā vipariṇāmadukkhatāti tividhadukkhatāsaṅkhātena rujjanena yuttatāya, yathārahamārammaṇavasena ca samannāgamavasena ca rāgādikilesāsucivissandanato, ahutvā sambhavanato, uppattiyā uddhumātattā jarābhaṅgehi ca yathākkamaṃ paripakkapabhinnabhāvato gaṇḍasadisoti gaṇḍato daṭṭhabbo. Avasavattanatāya, avidheyyatāya ca parato. Yathā hi paro patanto parassa vasaṃ na gacchati, evametaṃ subhasukhādibhāvena vase vattetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya avasavattanato ‘‘mā jīratha, mā marathā’’tiādinā vidhātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya avidheyyabhāvato parato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Byādhijarāmaraṇehi palujjanato, ābyāsanato ca palokato. Idaṃ byādhiādīhi pakārehi bhijjanato, vinassanato, etehi eva vā ābyāsanato byasanatthassa loka-saddassa pavisiṭṭhassa ābyāsanatthatāya palokato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Chandanti rajjanavasena pavattaṃ chandaṃ.
767 由法军统帅(来说):法军的统领、引导者就是法军统帅,即长老舍利弗,由他(来说)。其义被称为“利益”者,就是有利益者,由他(来说)。“恭敬地”是指在学习和受持等事情上不懒惰。巴利
767.Dhammasenāpatināti dhammasenāya pati nāyakoti dhammasenāpati, sāriputtatthero, tena. Hitasaṅkhāto attho etassāti hitatthi, tena. Sakkaccāti uggahaṇadhāraṇādīsu atandito hutvā.